You are on page 1of 272

PROCEDURES

NORMAL PROCEDURES
Intentionally left blank
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW PRELIMINARY PAGES - TABLE OF CONTENTS
OPERATING MANUAL

PRO-NOR-SOP Standard Operating Procedures


PRO-NOR-SOP-01 General Information
Foreword.................................................................................................................................................................. A

PRO-NOR-SOP-02 Flight Preparation


Technical Condition of the Aircraft.......................................................................................................................... A
Weather Briefing...................................................................................................................................................... B
NOTAMs.................................................................................................................................................................. C
GPS PRIMARY Availability (If Installed)................................................................................................................. D
Flight Plan and Operational Requirements............................................................................................................. E
Optimum Flight Level...............................................................................................................................................F
Fuel Requirements.................................................................................................................................................. G

PRO-NOR-SOP-03 Safety Exterior Inspection


Safety Exterior Inspection........................................................................................................................................A

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 Preliminary Cockpit Preparation


General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Aircraft Setup........................................................................................................................................................... B
Battery Check/Setup................................................................................................................................................C
APU Fire Test/APU Start........................................................................................................................................ D
AIR COND............................................................................................................................................................... E
Cargo Heat  ..................................................................................................................................................... F
Cockpit Lights.......................................................................................................................................................... G
EFB/ACARS (If Installed) Initialization.................................................................................................................... H
ECAM/LOGBOOK Check..........................................................................................................................................I
Preliminary Performance Determination.................................................................................................................. J
Operation Engineering Bulletins (OEB)...................................................................................................................K
Before Walkaround...................................................................................................................................................L

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround


General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Exterior Walkaround................................................................................................................................................ B

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 Cockpit Preparation


General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Overhead Panel....................................................................................................................................................... B
CTR Instrument Panel.............................................................................................................................................C
Pedestal................................................................................................................................................................... D
RMP......................................................................................................................................................................... E
ATC Datalink Communication..................................................................................................................................F
NAV Charts..............................................................................................................................................................G
Continued on the following page

PRO-NOR-PLP-TOC P 1/8
29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW PRELIMINARY PAGES - TABLE OF CONTENTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Continued from the previous page


FMGS Preparation...................................................................................................................................................H
Glareshield.................................................................................................................................................................I
Lateral Consoles.......................................................................................................................................................J
Instrument Panels.................................................................................................................................................... K
ECAM Control Panel................................................................................................................................................L
ADIRS......................................................................................................................................................................M
Takeoff Briefing........................................................................................................................................................N
PC Dedicated to Maintenance  .......................................................................................................................O
Flow Pattern.............................................................................................................................................................P

PRO-NOR-SOP-07 Before Pushback or Start


Before Start Clearance............................................................................................................................................ A
At Start Clearance................................................................................................................................................... B

PRO-NOR-SOP-08 Engine Start


Automatic Engine Start............................................................................................................................................A
Ground Run Up - Danger Areas............................................................................................................................. B

PRO-NOR-SOP-09 After Start


After Start.................................................................................................................................................................A

PRO-NOR-SOP-10 Taxi
Taxi...........................................................................................................................................................................A

PRO-NOR-SOP-11 Before Takeoff


Before Takeoff......................................................................................................................................................... A

PRO-NOR-SOP-12 Takeoff
Takeoff..................................................................................................................................................................... A

PRO-NOR-SOP-13 After Takeoff


After Takeoff............................................................................................................................................................ A

PRO-NOR-SOP-14 Climb
Climb........................................................................................................................................................................ A

PRO-NOR-SOP-15 Cruise
Cruise....................................................................................................................................................................... A

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 Descent Preparation


Descent Preparation................................................................................................................................................ A
Continued on the following page

PRO-NOR-PLP-TOC P 2/8
29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW PRELIMINARY PAGES - TABLE OF CONTENTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Continued from the previous page


PRO-NOR-SOP-17 Descent
Descent Initiation..................................................................................................................................................... A
Descent Monitoring.................................................................................................................................................. B
Descent Adjustment.................................................................................................................................................C
Approach Checklist..................................................................................................................................................D
10 000 ft Flow Pattern.............................................................................................................................................E

PRO-NOR-SOP-18 Approach
PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A Approach General
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A
Cross-Reference Table............................................................................................................................................B
Flying Reference......................................................................................................................................................C
Stabilization Criteria.................................................................................................................................................D
Approach Speed Technique.................................................................................................................................... E
Discontinued Approach............................................................................................................................................ F

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B Aircraft Configuration Management


Initial Approach........................................................................................................................................................ A
Intermediate/Final Approach....................................................................................................................................B

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C Aircraft Guidance Management


Approach using LOC G/S Guidance....................................................................................................................... A
Approach using FINAL APP Guidance................................................................................................................... B
Approach using FINAL APP Guidance for RNAV(RNP).........................................................................................C
Approach using FPA Guidance...............................................................................................................................D
Circling Approach.....................................................................................................................................................E
RNAV Visual Approach............................................................................................................................................F
Visual Approach...................................................................................................................................................... G

PRO-NOR-SOP-19 Landing
Manual Landing....................................................................................................................................................... A
Autoland................................................................................................................................................................... B

PRO-NOR-SOP-20 Go-Around
Go Around with FD..................................................................................................................................................A
Go Around with No FD............................................................................................................................................B

PRO-NOR-SOP-21 After Landing


After Landing............................................................................................................................................................A
Continued on the following page

PRO-NOR-PLP-TOC P 3/8
29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW PRELIMINARY PAGES - TABLE OF CONTENTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Continued from the previous page


PRO-NOR-SOP-22 Parking
Parking..................................................................................................................................................................... A

PRO-NOR-SOP-23 Securing the Aircraft


Securing the Aircraft................................................................................................................................................ A

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 Standard Callouts


Communications and Standard Terms....................................................................................................................A
Checklist Callouts.................................................................................................................................................... B
Actions Commanded by PF.................................................................................................................................... C
FMA..........................................................................................................................................................................D
Altitude..................................................................................................................................................................... E
Flaps or Gear Callouts............................................................................................................................................ F
Flight Parameters.................................................................................................................................................... G
PF/PM Duties Transfer............................................................................................................................................H
Summary for Each Phase.........................................................................................................................................I

PRO-NOR-SUP Supplementary Procedures


PRO-NOR-SUP-SUP Supplementary Procedures Menu
Supplementary Procedures..................................................................................................................................... A

PRO-NOR-SUP-ADVWXR Adverse Weather


Airframe Deicing/Anti-Icing Procedure on Ground.................................................................................................. A
Ground Operations in Cold Weather Conditions.....................................................................................................B
Ground Operations in Heavy Rain..........................................................................................................................C
Minimum Speed with Ice Accretion.........................................................................................................................D
Operations on Contaminated Airports..................................................................................................................... E
Operations with Volcanic Ash, Sand or Dust.......................................................................................................... F
Securing the Aircraft for Cold Soak........................................................................................................................ G
For Draining Water Procedure................................................................................................................................ H
Water System Draining............................................................................................................................................. I
Continued on the following page

PRO-NOR-PLP-TOC P 4/8
29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW PRELIMINARY PAGES - TABLE OF CONTENTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Continued from the previous page


PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Engines
Manual Engine Start................................................................................................................................................ A
Engine Start with an Air Start Unit..........................................................................................................................B
Crossbleed Engine Start......................................................................................................................................... C
Air Conditioning during Automatic Engine Start......................................................................................................D
Engine Start Valve Manual Operation.....................................................................................................................E
Engine Ventilation (Dry Cranking)........................................................................................................................... F
One Engine Taxi - General.....................................................................................................................................G
One Engine Taxi - At Departure............................................................................................................................. H
One Engine Taxi - At Arrival.................................................................................................................................... I

PRO-NOR-SUP-FUEL Fuel
Refueling.................................................................................................................................................................. A
Refueling with One Engine Running....................................................................................................................... B
Ground Fuel Transfer.............................................................................................................................................. C
Defueling.................................................................................................................................................................. D

PRO-NOR-SUP-LG L/G
PRO-NOR-SUP-LG-LG_DN Flight With Landing Gear Down
Flight With Landing Gear Down.............................................................................................................................. A

PRO-NOR-SUP-LG-LG Operation with Nosewheel Steering Offset


Operation with Nosewheel Steering Offset............................................................................................................. A

PRO-NOR-SUP-MISC Miscellaneous
PRO-NOR-SUP-MISC-E Flight Without Cabin Pressurization
Flight Without Cabin Pressurization........................................................................................................................ A

PRO-NOR-SUP-MISC-A High Altitude Airport Operations


High Altitude Airport Operations..............................................................................................................................A

PRO-NOR-SUP-MISC-C Operations at QNH Above 1050 hPa


General.....................................................................................................................................................................A
Consequences......................................................................................................................................................... B
Standby Altitude Correction.....................................................................................................................................C
Procedures...............................................................................................................................................................D

PRO-NOR-SUP-MISC-D Pushback with Power Push Unit


Pushback with Power Push Unit Via the Main Landing Gear.................................................................................A
Continued on the following page

PRO-NOR-PLP-TOC P 5/8
29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW PRELIMINARY PAGES - TABLE OF CONTENTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Continued from the previous page


PRO-NOR-SUP-SURV Surveillance
Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B)....................................................................................... A
Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS)....................................................................................... B

PRO-NOR-SRP Systems Related Procedures


PRO-NOR-SRP-01 FMS
PRO-NOR-SRP-01-05 Introduction
Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................A

PRO-NOR-SRP-01-10 Cockpit Preparation


FMGS Initialization...................................................................................................................................................A
Flight Plan Initialization............................................................................................................................................B
FMGS Data Insertion...............................................................................................................................................C
FMGS Re-Initialization After a Canceled Flight...................................................................................................... D

PRO-NOR-SRP-01-15 Before Pushback or Start


Change of Runway.................................................................................................................................................. A
TAKEOFF FROM INTERSECTION.........................................................................................................................B

PRO-NOR-SRP-01-20 Taxi
FCU Selection for Takeoff.......................................................................................................................................A
FMA Mode Check....................................................................................................................................................B
Selecting a Navigation Display................................................................................................................................C
Selecting Takeoff Displays for Pilot's and Copilot's MCDU.................................................................................... D

PRO-NOR-SRP-01-30 Takeoff
Monitoring the Takeoff.............................................................................................................................................A
PRESELECTING A HDG OR A TRK......................................................................................................................B
Normal Takeoff Profile.............................................................................................................................................C
No Flight Director Takeoff....................................................................................................................................... D
TAKEOFF WITH NO V2 ENTRY............................................................................................................................ E
Takeoff Using the Localizer of the Opposite Runway.............................................................................................F

PRO-NOR-SRP-01-40 Climb
Monitoring the Climb Phase.................................................................................................................................... A
Expedite Climb.........................................................................................................................................................B
Immediate Return to Origin Airport......................................................................................................................... C
Continued on the following page

PRO-NOR-PLP-TOC P 6/8
29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW PRELIMINARY PAGES - TABLE OF CONTENTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Continued from the previous page


PRO-NOR-SRP-01-50 Cruise
Reaching Cruise Flight Level.................................................................................................................................. A
Monitoring the Navigation Accuracy........................................................................................................................B
Monitoring the Fuel Predictions...............................................................................................................................C
Entering a Step Climb or a Step Descent.............................................................................................................. D
Immediate Change of Level in Cruise.....................................................................................................................E
Preparation for Descent and Approach................................................................................................................... F

PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60 Descent
DESCENT INITIATION............................................................................................................................................ A
Descent Monitoring.................................................................................................................................................. B
Expedite Descent (If installed)................................................................................................................................ C
Monitoring the Navigation in the Terminal Control Area.........................................................................................D
Too Steep Path........................................................................................................................................................E
Holding Pattern........................................................................................................................................................ F
MANUAL TERMINATION........................................................................................................................................G

PRO-NOR-SRP-01-70 Approach
Initial Approach........................................................................................................................................................ A
ILS/MLS/GLS/FLS Approach................................................................................................................................... B
Switching from Non ILS to ILS Approach............................................................................................................... C
Landing Categories..................................................................................................................................................D
Warnings for ILS Approach..................................................................................................................................... E

PRO-NOR-SRP-01-80 Go-Around
MONITORING THE GO-AROUND..........................................................................................................................A
Go-Around Profile.................................................................................................................................................... B
Missed Approach: Try Again...................................................................................................................................C
Missed Approach: Divert......................................................................................................................................... D
Task Sharing During a Go-Around..........................................................................................................................E

PRO-NOR-PLP-TOC P 7/8
29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW PRELIMINARY PAGES - TABLE OF CONTENTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Intentionally left blank

PRO-NOR-PLP-TOC P 8/8
29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GENERAL INFORMATION
OPERATING MANUAL

FOREWORD
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-01-00010142.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

The procedures contained in this Chapter are recommended by Airbus, and are consistent with the
other Chapters of this manual.
The Authorities do not certificate Standard Operating Procedures. The manufacturer presents them
herein as the best way to proceed, from a technical and operational standpoint. They are continually
updated and the revisions take into account Operator input, as well as manufacturer experience.
In addition, Operators may amend them, as needed. However, the manufacturer recommends that
Operators using the FCOM as onboard operational manual submit suggested changes to expedite
publication, and maintain consistency of the manual. The Operator should note that they may rewrite
this Chapter, at their own responsibility; this could, however, make it difficult to update the manual
and keep it consistent with the other Chapters.
The following sections contain expanded information on normal procedures.
Standard Operating Procedures consist of inspections, preparations, and normal procedures. All
items of a given procedure are listed in a sequence that follows a standardized scan of the cockpit
panels, unless that sequence goes against the action priority logic, to ensure that all actions are
performed in the most efficient way.
These procedures assume that all systems are operating normally, and that all automatic functions
are used normally.
Standard Operating Procedures consider that both pilots use Electronic Flight Bag (EFB). Airbus
recommends operating with two EFBs in order to reduce the risk of erroneous inputs.
The FCOM also contains normal procedures that are non-routine procedures in the Supplementary
Procedures chapter and in the Special Operations chapter.

PRO-NOR-SOP-01 P 1/2
A 05 DEC 17
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GENERAL INFORMATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Intentionally left blank

PRO-NOR-SOP-01 P 2/2
05 DEC 17
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - FLIGHT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

TECHNICAL CONDITION OF THE AIRCRAFT


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-02-00010147.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

The crew will verify the technical state of the aircraft (deferred defect list), with regard to
airworthiness, acceptability of malfunctions (MEL), and influence on the flight plan.

WEATHER BRIEFING
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-02-00010148.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

‐ The crew will get a weather briefing


‐ The briefing should include:
• Actual and expected weather conditions, including runway conditions for takeoff and climb-out
• Significant weather enroute, including winds and temperatures
• Terminal forecasts for destination and alternate airports
• Actual weather for destination and alternates, for short range flights and recent past weather, if
available
• Survey of the meteorological conditions at airports along the planned route.
Weather can affect the choice of routing (for example, influence which route is quickest) and
the choice of flight level. The flight crew must also consider the possibility of runways being
contaminated at the departure and destination airfields. The flight crew must also verify ISA
deviations and enroute icing conditions, and must consider the possibility of holding due to weather
at the destination.

NOTAMS
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-02-00010149.0002001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

‐ The flight crew must examine NOTAMs for changes to routings, unserviceable navaids, availability
of runways and approach aids etc, all of which may affect the final fuel requirement
‐ In order to prevent the risks of projection of debris towards the trimmable horizontal stabilizer
and the elevators, it is not recommended to takeoff from runways in bad condition (loose surface,
under repair, covered with debris...)

PRO-NOR-SOP-02 P 1/4
A to C 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - FLIGHT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

GPS PRIMARY AVAILABILITY (IF INSTALLED)


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-02-00014998.0002001 / 20 MAR 17

 For RNP1 operations, RNAV(GNSS) approaches and RNAV(RNP)  approaches:


RAIM/AIME has been demonstrated to be available 100% of the time with 24 healthy satellites.
If required by operational regulation, for specific conditions (e.g RNAV(RNP), mountainous
terrain or less than 24 satellites) an appropriate Ground-Based Prediction Program should be
used to check the RAIM/AIME for each intended procedure (arrival, departure and alternate if
required)

FLIGHT PLAN AND OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-02-00010150.0001001 / 18 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL

‐ The crew will check the company flight plan for routing, altitudes, and flight time
‐ The Captain will check the ATC flight plan and ensure that:
• It is filled in and filed, in accordance with the prescribed procedures
• It agrees with the fuel flight plan routing.
‐ The crew will check the estimated load figures, and will calculate the maximum allowable takeoff
and landing weights.

OPTIMUM FLIGHT LEVEL


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-02-00010151.0001001 / 17 NOV 20
Applicable to: ALL

The flight crew should choose a flight level that is as close to the optimum as possible. To determine
the optimum flight level, use the performance application of EFB.
As a general rule, an altitude that is 4 000 ft below the optimum produces a significant penalty
(approximately 5 % of fuel). Flight 8 000 ft below the optimum altitude produces a penalty of more
than 10 % against trip fuel. (The usual contingency allowance is 5 %).

PRO-NOR-SOP-02 P 2/4
D to F 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - FLIGHT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-02-00010152.0001001 / 17 NOV 20
Applicable to: ALL

COMPUTERIZED FLIGHT PLAN CHECK


In most cases the flight crew uses a computer-derived flight plan to obtain the correct fuel
requirements. Although these computerized requirements are normally accurate, the flight crew
must check them for gross errors.
Ensure that both the captain and the first officer have verified that the fuel calculations and
required fuel on board are correct and that the figure complies with the applicable regulations.
FUEL TRANSPORTATION
The flight crew must check the policy covering the “tankering” of fuel on sectors where there is a
favourable fuel price differential or operational requirement.
Remember that carrying unnecessary extra fuel increases the fuel consumption for that sector and
therefore reduces the economy of the operation (lower flex temperature, more tire and brake wear,
more time in climb phase, lower optimum flight level etc).

PRO-NOR-SOP-02 P 3/4
G 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - FLIGHT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Intentionally left blank

PRO-NOR-SOP-02 P 4/4
18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - SAFETY EXTERIOR INSPECTION

SAFETY EXTERIOR INSPECTION


Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-03-A-00010153.0001001 / 05 DEC 17

Items marked by asterisks (*) are the only steps to be completed after a transit stop without flight
crew change. Otherwise, the new flight crew performs all the items.
This inspection ensures that the aircraft and its surroundings are safe for operations.
On arriving at the aircraft, check for obstructions in the vicinity, engineering activity, refueling, etc.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-03-A-00010154.0001001 / 04 MAR 14

* WHEEL CHOCKS.................................................................................................................. CHECK


If the wheel chocks are not in position, the flight crew must check that the parking brake is set with
sufficient accumulator pressure.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-03-A-00010155.0001001 / 18 MAR 11

* LANDING GEAR DOORS....................................................................................CHECK POSITION


WARNING Do not pressurize the green hydraulic system without clearance from ground
personnel, if any gear door is open. Remember that the green hydraulic system is
pressurized if the yellow system is pressurized and the PTU is on AUTO.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-03-A-00010156.0001001 / 05 AUG 10

* APU AREA............................................................................................................................. CHECK


Observe that the APU inlet and outlet are clear.

PRO-NOR-SOP-03 P 1/2
A 05 DEC 17
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - SAFETY EXTERIOR INSPECTION

Intentionally left blank

PRO-NOR-SOP-03 P 2/2
05 DEC 17
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION

GENERAL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-00010164.0001001 / 05 JUN 18
Applicable to: ALL

Items marked by asterisks (*) are the only steps to be completed after a transit stop without flight
crew change. Otherwise, the new flight crew performs all the items.
The following procedure, ensures that all the required checks are performed before applying
electrical power to avoid inadvertent operation of systems and danger to the aircraft and personnel.
The APU start and the establishment of electrical and pneumatic power are included.

AIRCRAFT SETUP
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-A-00021906.0001001 / 30 AUG 17
Applicable to: ALL

WARNING Do not pressurize the hydraulic systems until clearance is obtained from ground
personnel.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-A-00010165.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

ENG
ENG MASTERS 1, 2................................................................................................................... OFF
ENG MODE selector................................................................................................................NORM
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-A-00011188.0003001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: NEO

WEATHER RADAR
* WXR/PWS sw .........................................................................................................................OFF
* CAPT DISPLAY mode selector ..............................................................................................OFF
* F/O DISPLAY mode selector ................................................................................................. OFF
* GAIN knob ........................................................................................................................... AUTO
* TURB sw ..............................................................................................................................AUTO
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-A-00011188.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: CEO

WEATHER RADAR
* RADAR sw ..............................................................................................................................OFF
* WINDSHEAR / PWS sw  .................................................................................................. OFF
* GAIN knob ................................................................................................................... AUTO/CAL
* MODE selector ..............................................................................................................AS RQRD

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 1/12
A to B → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-A-00010166.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

L/G
L/G lever.................................................................................................................................. DOWN
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-A-00010167.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

WIPERS
Both WIPER selectors................................................................................................................. OFF

BATTERY CHECK/SETUP
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-00010168.0001001 / 30 AUG 17
Applicable to: ALL

 If the aircraft has not been electrically supplied for 6 h or more, perform the following
check:
BAT 1 pb and BAT 2 pb......................................................................................... CHECK OFF
BAT 1 and 2 VOLTAGE......................................................................... CHECK ABOVE 25.5 V
Battery voltage above 25.5 V ensures a charge above 50 %.
 If the battery voltage is at or below 25.5 V:
A charging cycle of about 20 min is required.
BAT 1 pb and BAT 2 pb..............................................................................................AUTO
EXT PWR pb-sw.............................................................................................................. ON
Check on ELEC SD page, that the battery contactor is closed and the batteries are
charging.
 After 20 min:
BAT 1 + 2 pb........................................................................................................... OFF
BAT 1 and 2 VOLTAGE............................................................ CHECK ABOVE 25.5 V
BAT 1 + 2 pb........................................................................................................ AUTO
 If the battery voltage is above 25.5 V:
BAT 1 pb and BAT 2 pb..............................................................................................AUTO
If the APU is started on batteries only, it should be started within 30 min after the selection
of batteries to AUTO (35 min after battery selection to AUTO, the battery charge is less
than 25 % of maximum capacity).
 If the aircraft has been electrically supplied during the last 6 h:
BAT 1 pb and BAT 2 pb.................................................................................................... AUTO

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 2/12
← B to C → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION

 If the AVAIL light is on:


EXT PWR pb-sw.....................................................................................................................ON

APU FIRE TEST/APU START


Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-B-00010170.0001001 / 28 MAY 20

APU FIRE
APU FIRE pb-sw.....................................................................................CHECK IN and GUARDED
APU AGENT light ......................................................................................................... CHECK OFF
APU FIRE TEST pb...................................................................................... PRESS and MAINTAIN
TEST RESULT
Check that the APU fire detection and extinguishing system is operative:
‐ APU FIRE warning on (if AC power available):
‐ ECAM
‐ CRC
‐ MASTER WARN light
‐ APU FIRE pb-sw lighted red (lighted partially if AC power not available)
‐ SQUIB light and DISCH light on
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-B-00010171.0015001 / 04 NOV 20

APU START
 If the EXT PWR pb-sw ON light is on:
APU MASTER SW pb-sw ..................................................................................................... ON
APU START pb-sw ................................................................................................................ON
Note: Wait at least 3 s before selecting APU START pb-sw.
For more information on the APU start, Refer to DSC-49-20 Overhead Panel - Illustration.
For more information on APU starter limitations and APU operations during refueling:
‐ Refer to LIM-APU APU Start
‐ Refer to LIM-APU APU Start/Shutdown during Refueling/Defueling.
* EXT PWR pb-sw .................................................................................................... AS RQRD
The flight crew should keep ON the external power units to reduce the APU load, particularly
in hot weather conditions.
 If the EXT PWR pb-sw ON light is off:
APU MASTER SW pb-sw ..................................................................................................... ON

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 3/12
← C to D → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION

APU START pb-sw ................................................................................................................ON


Note: Wait at least 3 s before selecting APU START pb-sw.
For more information on the APU start, Refer to DSC-49-20 Overhead Panel - Illustration.
For more information on APU starter limitations and APU operations during refueling:
‐ Refer to LIM-APU APU Start
‐ Refer to LIM-APU APU Start/Shutdown during Refueling/Defueling.

AIR COND
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-00010177.0001001 / 14 OCT 15
Applicable to: ALL

AIR COND
 When the APU is AVAIL:
APU BLEED pb-sw................................................................................................................. ON
Do not use APU BLEED, if the ground personnel confirms that a LP or HP ground air unit is
connected to the aircraft.
To determine if an HP ground air unit is connected, the flight crew should also check on the
BLEED SD page, if there is pressure in the bleed air system.
ALL WHITE LIGHTS............................................................................................................. OFF
X BLEED selector.............................................................................................................. AUTO
Zone temperature selectors.........................................................................................AS RQRD
Full range temperature 24 ± 6 °C (75 ± 11 °F).

CARGO HEAT 
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-00010178.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

CARGO HEAT 
TEMPERATURE selector ................................................................................................. AS RQRD

COCKPIT LIGHTS
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-00010172.0002001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: ALL

COCKPIT LIGHTS
* COCKPIT LIGHTS..........................................................................................................AS RQRD
Set INT LT, FLOOD LT, INTEG LT (included glareshield and FCU).

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 4/12
← D to G 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION

EFB/ACARS (IF INSTALLED) INITIALIZATION


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-C-00021913.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

EFB START
ALL EFB.................................................................................................................................. START
 In accordance with the Operator's policy or if required by operational regulation:
EFB/eQRH VERSION......................................................................................................CHECK
If required, the flight crew performs this check unless a specific procedure is established as
per Operator's policy to ensure that the correct version is onboard.
On the EFB STATUS page and the eQRH My aircraft page, check the EFB VERSION number
and compare it with the valid version number given as reference by the Operator (e.g. on the
company flight plan).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-C-00021947.0001001 / 04 DEC 18
Applicable to: ALL

ACARS INITIALIZATION
* ACARS  ................................................................................................................. INITIALIZE
Initialize ACARS if not done automatically, as per company policy.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-C-00014422.0001001 / 04 DEC 18
Applicable to: ALL

FMGS PRE-INITIALIZATION
Perform FMGS Pre-Initialization in the case of ACARS  operations or EFB operations with
SYNCHRO AVIONICS  .
At electrical power-up, the FMGSs and FCU run through various internal tests. Allow enough time
(3 min) for tests’ completion, and do not start to press pushbuttons until the tests are over. If the
“PLEASE WAIT” message appears, do not press any MCDU key until the message clears.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-C-00014423.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

* ENGINE & AIRCRAFT TYPE................................................................................................ CHECK

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 5/12
H→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-C-00014424.0001001 / 04 DEC 18
Applicable to: FMC HONEYWELL

* FM database validity.............................................................................................................. CHECK


‐ Check DATA BASE validity and stored WPT/NAVAIDS/RWY/ROUTES, if any. If applicable, review
the stored data for deletion decision.
‐ On Honeywell FMS, the double AIRAC cycle of the NDB has one day in common (AIRAC Cycle #1
Day 29 / AIRAC Cycle #2 Day 1). From Day 2 of AIRAC Cycle #2, the active database is no longer
valid and the message "CHECK DATA BASE CYCLE" will be triggered.
On the common day, select AIRAC Cycle #2 prior to the first flight of the day.

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-C-00014424.0002001 / 04 DEC 18


Applicable to: FMC THALES

* FM database validity.............................................................................................................. CHECK


‐ Check DATA BASE validity and stored WPT/NAVAIDS/RWY/ROUTES, if any. If applicable, review
the stored data for deletion decision.
‐ On Thales FMS, if the "CHECK DATA BASE CYCLE" message triggers, the active database is no
longer valid. Therefore, on Day 1 of AIRAC Cycle #2, select AIRAC Cycle #2 prior to the first flight
of the day.

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-C-00014425.0001001 / 05 JUN 18


Applicable to: ALL

* FLT NBR.................................................................................................................. INSERT/CHECK


L2 Insert FLT NBR only if the company flight plan is not received via ACARS.
L1 * FROM/TO................................................................................................................. INSERT/CHECK

L2 Insert FROM/TO only if the company flight plan is not received via ACARS.

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 6/12
←H→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-C-00021927.0001001 / 04 JUN 19
Applicable to: ALL

EFB STATUS PAGE


* EFB SYNCHRO AVIONICS  ......................................................................................... CLICK
* EFB STATUS page.............................................................................................. INSERT/CHECK
L2
On the EFB STATUS page, each flight crewmember checks or, inserts and checks (if no EFB
SYNCHRO AVIONICS):
‐ ACFT TYPE and ACFT REG
‐ FLT NBR and FROM/TO (in agreement with the FMS ACTIVE/INIT page).

ECAM/LOGBOOK CHECK
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-00021915.0001001 / 05 MAR 19
Applicable to: ALL

* RCL pb ............................................................................................................................PRESS 3 s
This action recalls all the warnings that the flight crew cleared or cancelled during the last flight
* LOGBOOK .............................................................................................................................CHECK
‐ In the logbook check the technical condition of the aircraft (deferred defect list) with regard to
airworthiness, acceptability of the MEL, or the Configuration Deviation List (CDL), and influence on
the flight plan.
‐ Crosscheck with ECAM recall.
* MEL/CDL ITEMS (as appropriate).............................................. CHECK DISPATCH CONDITIONS
Access the MEL and CDL items via the Ops Library Browser.
As appropriate, check and activate MEL and CDL items. The activated MEL and CDL items are sent
to the performance applications.
* AIRCRAFT ACCEPTANCE...............................................................................................PERFORM
Note: The aircraft acceptance can be performed later, but must be completed at the end of the
Cockpit Preparation.

PRELIMINARY PERFORMANCE DETERMINATION


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-00021916.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-PRELIMINARY COCKPIT


PREPARATION-Preliminary Takeoff Performance Computation

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 7/12
← H to J → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION

Each flight crewmember independently computes the preliminary performance data in accordance
with the technical condition of the aircraft and/or any other criteria that may impact the aircraft
performance (e.g. NOTAM, runway condition, aircraft configuration).
* AIRFIELD DATA.................................................................................................................... OBTAIN
Obtain data needed for initializing the system, preparing the cockpit and for preliminary takeoff
performance computation. The airfield data should include: RUNWAY IN USE, ALTIMETER
SETTING, and WEATHER DATA.
 If the LOADSHEET application is used :
* PRELIMINARY LOADING.......................................................COMPUTE AND CROSSCHECK
 If dispatch under MEL and in accordance with the logbook:
* MEL/CDL ITEMS (as appropriate)............................................................. CHECK ACTIVATED
As appropriate, check that the MEL and CDL items are activated in the applicable T.O PERF
application.
* PRELIMINARY TAKEOFF PERF DATA...........................................................................COMPUTE
The PF and the PM independently compute the preliminary takeoff performance data.
* PRELIMINARY TAKEOFF PERF DATA................................................................... CROSSCHECK
The PF and the PM compare and ensure that the computations are the same.

OPERATION ENGINEERING BULLETINS (OEB)


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-00021914.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

* OEB........................................................................................................................................ CHECK
Go to the OEB section of the QRH and review all OEBs (particularly red OEBs) that are applicable to
the aircraft.
Note: If there is a transfer of duties during this flight, the flight crew must remind the incoming
flight crew of the applicable OEB(s) during the briefing that is done when transferring the
duties.

BEFORE WALKAROUND
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-E-00021917.0001001 / 04 JUN 19
Applicable to: CFM

ECAM PAGES
 On the DOOR SD page:
* OXY ....................................................................................................... CHECK PRESSURE

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 8/12
← J to L → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION

 If the OXY pressure is half boxed in amber:


MIN FLT CREW OXY CHART............................................................. CHECK PRESSURE
Verify that the pressure is sufficient for the scheduled flight (Refer to LIM-OXY Minimum
Flight Crew Oxygen Pressure).
 On the HYD SD page:
* RESERVOIR FLUID LEVEL............................................ CHECK WITHIN NORMAL RANGE
Note: The volume of the hydraulic fluid in the reservoirs may change with Outside Air
Temperature. As a result, the reservoir fluid level that appears on the HYD SD page
may be outside of the normal range with no HYD RSVR LO AIR PR or HYD RSVR
LO LVL warning. If the fluid level is outside of the normal range, contact maintenance
to determine if service is required.
 On the ENG SD page:
* ENG OIL QUANTITY.................................................................................. CHECK NORMAL
Check that the oil quantity is at or above 9.5 qt + estimated consumption (average estimated
consumption ~ 0.5 qt/h).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-E-00021917.0002001 / 04 JUN 19
Applicable to: V2500

ECAM PAGES
 On the DOOR SD page:
* OXY ....................................................................................................... CHECK PRESSURE
 If the OXY pressure is half boxed in amber:
MIN FLT CREW OXY CHART............................................................. CHECK PRESSURE
Verify that the pressure is sufficient for the scheduled flight (Refer to LIM-OXY Minimum
Flight Crew Oxygen Pressure).
 On the HYD SD page:
* RESERVOIR FLUID LEVEL............................................ CHECK WITHIN NORMAL RANGE
Note: The volume of the hydraulic fluid in the reservoirs may change with Outside Air
Temperature. As a result, the reservoir fluid level that appears on the HYD SD page
may be outside of the normal range with no HYD RSVR LO AIR PR or HYD RSVR
LO LVL warning. If the fluid level is outside of the normal range, contact maintenance
to determine if service is required.
 On the ENG SD page:
* ENG OIL QUANTITY.................................................................................. CHECK NORMAL
Check that the oil quantity is at or above 11 qt + estimated consumption (average estimated
consumption ~ 0.3 qt/h).

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 9/12
←L→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-E-00021917.0005001 / 26 NOV 19
Applicable to: LEAP1A

ECAM PAGES
 On the DOOR SD page:
* OXY ....................................................................................................... CHECK PRESSURE
 If the OXY pressure is half boxed in amber:
MIN FLT CREW OXY CHART............................................................. CHECK PRESSURE
Verify that the pressure is sufficient for the scheduled flight (Refer to LIM-OXY Minimum
Flight Crew Oxygen Pressure).
 On the HYD SD page:
* RESERVOIR FLUID LEVEL............................................ CHECK WITHIN NORMAL RANGE
Note: The volume of the hydraulic fluid in the reservoirs may change with Outside Air
Temperature. As a result, the reservoir fluid level that appears on the HYD SD page
may be outside of the normal range with no HYD RSVR LO AIR PR or HYD RSVR
LO LVL warning. If the fluid level is outside of the normal range, contact maintenance
to determine if service is required.
 On the ENG SD page:
* ENG OIL QUANTITY.................................................................................. CHECK NORMAL
Check that the oil quantity is at or above 8.9 qt + estimated consumption (maximum estimated
consumption ~ 0.45 qt/h) and not below 10.6 qt.
Note: 1. If the engines have been shut down for more than 60 min, decrease the above
quantities by 3 qt to take into account the oil thermal expansion.
2. If the engine oil quantity indication does not appear on the ENG SD page, set the
ENG 1 and 2 FADEC GND PWR pb-sw on the overhead maintenance panel to
ON. After the check of the engine oil quantity, set the ENG 1 and 2 FADEC GND
PWR pb-sw to off.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-E-00010173.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

F/CTL
FLAPS.................................................................................................................. CHECK POSITION
Check the upper ECAM display to confirm that the FLAPS position agrees with the handle
position.
* SPEEDBRAKE lever........................................................ CHECK RETRACTED and DISARMED
WARNING If flight control surface positions do not agree with the control handle positions,
check with the maintenance crew before applying hydraulic power.

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 10/12
←L→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-E-00010174.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

PARKING BRAKE
* ACCU PRESS indicator..................................................................................................... CHECK
The ACCU PRESS indication must be in the green band. If required use the electric pump on
yellow hydraulic system to recharge the brake accumulator.
* PARKING BRAKE handle......................................................................................................... ON
When one brake temperature is above 500 °C, avoid applying the parking brake, unless
operationally necessary.
* BRAKES PRESS indicator................................................................................................. CHECK
Check for normal indications.
WARNING Yellow and green hydraulic systems are pressurized from yellow electric pump.
Get ground crew clearance before using the electric pump.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-E-00010175.0001001 / 30 JUN 15
Applicable to: OLD

ALTERNATE BRAKING SYSTEM


Note: The purpose of this check is to verify, before the first flight of the day, the efficiency of the
alternate braking system (absence of “spongy pedals”).
Y ELEC PUMP pb-sw....................................................................................................CHECK OFF
CHOCKS.............................................................................................................. CHECK IN PLACE
PARK BRK handle.......................................................................................................................OFF
BRAKE PEDALS.....................................................................................................................PRESS
Apply maximum pressure on both pedals.
BRAKE PRESSURE (on BRAKE press indicator)................................................................. CHECK
Pressure must build up without delay symmetrically on left and right sides for the same application
simultaneously applied on left and right pedals. With full pedal deflection, the pressure must be
between 2 000 and 2 700 PSI.
BRAKE PEDALS................................................................................................................ RELEASE
PARK BRK handle........................................................................................................................ ON
The parking brake must be on during the exterior inspection to allow the flight crew to check brake
wear indicators.

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 11/12
←L→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - PRELIMINARY COCKPIT PREPARATION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-E-00010206.0001001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: ALL

EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
EMER EQPT.......................................................................................................................... CHECK
Check the emergency equipments as follows:
‐ Life jackets stowed
‐ Axe stowed
‐ Smoke hoods  or portable oxygen equipment and full face masks  stowed and
serviceable
‐ Portable fire extinguisher lockwired and pressure in the green area
‐ Smoke goggles stowed (smoke hoods  )
‐ Oxygen masks stowed
‐ Flashlights stowed
‐ Escape ropes stowed
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-E-00010207.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

RAIN REPELLENT
RAIN RPLNT indicators  ..................................................CHECK PRESSURE and QUANTITY
CAUTION Never use rain repellent to wash the windshield and never use it on a dry
windshield.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-E-00010208.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

REAR AND OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS PANELS


REAR and OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKERS panels......................................................... CHECK
Check that all circuit breakers are set. Reset as necessary.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-04-E-00010209.0001001 / 25 JAN 17
Applicable to: ALL

LANDING GEAR PINS AND COVERS


* GEAR PINS and COVERS..................................................... CHECK ONBOARD and STOWED
Check that three are on board and stowed.

PRO-NOR-SOP-04 P 12/12
←L 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

GENERAL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-00010360.0001001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: ALL

The exterior walkaround ensures that the general condition of the aircraft is satisfactory and that the
visible aircraft components and equipment are safe for the flight:
‐ There is no impact damage to the structure
‐ There is no evident fuel, oil, or hydraulic leak
‐ All ground access doors are closed.
The flight crew must perform a complete walkaround before each flight.
The parking brake must be set to ON during the exterior walkaround, in order to enable the flight
crew to check brake wear indicators.
WARNING If any landing gear door is open, do not apply hydraulic power until clearance is
obtained from ground personnel.

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 1/16
A 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010361.0001001 / 04 MAY 15
Applicable to: ALL

SCHEMATIC

(1) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - LH FWD Fuselage

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 2/16
B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

(2) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - Nose Section


(3) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - Nose L/G
(4) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - RH FWD Fuselage
(5) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - Lower Center Fuselage
(6) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - RH Center Wing
(7) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - ENG 2 LH Side
(8) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - ENG 2 RH Side
(9) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - RH Wing Leading Edge
(10) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - RH Wing Trailing Edge
(11) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - RH L/G and Fuselage
(12) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - RH AFT Fuselage
(13) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - TAIL
(14) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - APU
(15) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - LH AFT Fuselage
(16) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - LH Landing Gear
(17) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - LH Wing Trailing Edge
(18) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - LH Wing Leading Edge
(19) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - ENG 1 LH Side
(20) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - ENG 1 RH Side
(21) Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-05 Exterior Walkaround - LH Center Wing
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010363.0002001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: NEO

LH FWD FUSELAGE
AOA probes.................................................................................................................... CONDITION
F/O and CAPT static ports..................................................................................................... CLEAR
Avionics equipment vent air inlet valve.......................................................................... CONDITION
Oxygen bay.......................................................................................................................... CLOSED
Oxygen overboard discharge indicators................................................................................ GREEN
Toilet servicing door  ..................................................................................................... CLOSED

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 3/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010363.0001001 / 17 MAY 17


Applicable to: CEO

LH FWD FUSELAGE
AOA probes.................................................................................................................... CONDITION
F/O and CAPT static ports..................................................................................................... CLEAR
Avionics equipment vent air inlet valve.......................................................................... CONDITION
Oxygen bay.......................................................................................................................... CLOSED
Oxygen overboard discharge indicator.................................................................................. GREEN
Toilet servicing door  ..................................................................................................... CLOSED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010364.0001001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: ALL

NOSE SECTION
Pitot probes.....................................................................................................................CONDITION
STBY static ports.................................................................................................................... CLEAR
TAT probes..................................................................................................................... CONDITION
Radome and latches..................................................................................... CONDITION/LATCHED
Forward avionics compartment door....................................................................................CLOSED
Ground electrical power door (if not required.)....................................................................CLOSED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010365.0001001 / 26 NOV 19
Applicable to: ALL

NOSE L/G
Nose wheel chocks............................................................................................................ IN PLACE
Wheels and tires.............................................................................................................CONDITION
Nose gear structure........................................................................................................ CONDITION
Taxi, Takeoff and Runway Turnoff lights........................................................................CONDITION
Hydraulic lines and electrical wires................................................................................ CONDITION
Wheel well.............................................................................................................................. CHECK
Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010366.0001001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: ALL

RH FWD FUSELAGE
RH + AFT avionic compartment doors................................................................................ CLOSED
Avionic equipment vent air outlet valve..........................................................................CONDITION
F/O-CAPT static ports.............................................................................................................CLEAR
AOA probe...................................................................................................................... CONDITION
Forward cargo door and selector panel.................................................................................CHECK

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 4/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010367.0001001 / 20 DEC 16


Applicable to: A319/20

LOWER CENTER FUSELAGE


Potable water drain panel  ............................................................................................ CLOSED
Antennas......................................................................................................................... CONDITION
Drain mast.......................................................................................................................CONDITION
Emergency ram air inlet flap.......................................................................................... CONDITION
LP and HP ground connection doors.................................................................................. CLOSED
Anticollision light..................................................................................................................... CHECK
CTR TK magnetic fuel level....................................................................................................FLUSH
Pack air intakes and outlets................................................................................................... CLEAR
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010367.0002001 / 20 DEC 16
Applicable to: A321

LOWER CENTER FUSELAGE


Potable water drain panel ...................................................................................................CLOSED
Antennas......................................................................................................................... CONDITION
Drain mast.......................................................................................................................CONDITION
Emergency ram air inlet flap.......................................................................................... CONDITION
LP and HP ground connection doors.................................................................................. CLOSED
Anticollision light..................................................................................................................... CHECK
CTR TK magnetic fuel level....................................................................................................FLUSH
Pack air intakes and outlets................................................................................................... CLEAR
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010368.0002001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: A319/20

RH CENTER WING
Yellow hydraulic bay door....................................................................................................CLOSED
Fuel panel.............................................................................................................................CLOSED
Inner tank magnetic fuel......................................................................................................... FLUSH
Fuel water drain valve inner tank....................................................................................... NO LEAK
Landing light....................................................................................................................CONDITION
Slat 1...............................................................................................................................CONDITION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010368.0003001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: A321

RH CENTER WING
Yellow hydraulic bay door....................................................................................................CLOSED
Fuel panel.............................................................................................................................CLOSED

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 5/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Magnetic fuel level.................................................................................................................. FLUSH


Fuel water drain valve tank................................................................................................ NO LEAK
Landing light....................................................................................................................CONDITION
Slat 1...............................................................................................................................CONDITION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010370.0020001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: CFM

ENG 2 LH SIDE
Oil fill access door................................................................................................................CLOSED
Thrust reversers................................................................................................. CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl doors................................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED
Drain mast......................................................................................................CONDITION/NO LEAK
Engine inlet and fan blades................................................................................................... CHECK
Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010370.0017001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: LEAP1A

ENG 2 LH SIDE
Thrust reversers................................................................................................. CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl doors................................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl door latch flag..................................................................................CONDITION/CLOSED
Drain masts.................................................................................................... CONDITION/NO LEAK
Engine inlet and fan blades................................................................................................... CHECK
IDG oil level access door.....................................................................................................CLOSED
Starter valve override flapper door.........................................................................CHECK/CLOSED
Interphone jack flapper door  ..........................................................................CHECK/CLOSED

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010370.0011001 / 17 MAY 17


Applicable to: V2500

ENG 2 LH SIDE
Oil fill access door................................................................................................................CLOSED

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 6/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Master magnetic chip detector access door........................................................................ CLOSED


Thrust reversers................................................................................................. CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl doors................................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED
Drain mast......................................................................................................CONDITION/NO LEAK
Engine inlet and fan blades................................................................................................... CHECK
Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010371.0014001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: CFM

ENG 2 RH SIDE
Vent inlet................................................................................................................................. CLEAR
Pressure-relief/Start valve handle access door................................................................... CLOSED
Thrust reversers................................................................................................. CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl doors................................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED
Turbine exhaust ..................................................................................................................... CLEAR
Pylon/access panel......................................................................................... CONDITION/CLOSED
Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010371.0011001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: V2500

ENG 2 RH SIDE
Pressure-relief/Start valve handle access door................................................................... CLOSED
Thrust reversers................................................................................................. CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl doors................................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED
Turbine exhaust ..................................................................................................................... CLEAR
Pylon/access panel......................................................................................... CONDITION/CLOSED
Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010371.0009001 / 04 DEC 18
Applicable to: LEAP1A

ENG 2 RH SIDE
EEC blower inlet..................................................................................................................... CLEAR
Engine oil tank access door.................................................................................................CLOSED
Thrust reversers................................................................................................. CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl doors................................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED
Turbine exhaust ..................................................................................................................... CLEAR
Exhaust vent tube outlet................................................................................ CONDITION/NO LEAK
Pylon/access panel......................................................................................... CONDITION/CLOSED

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 7/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010372.0005001 / 17 MAY 17


Applicable to: LEAP1A

RH WING LEADING EDGE


Slats 2, 3, 4, 5................................................................................................................ CONDITION
Magnetic fuel level.................................................................................................................. FLUSH
Fuel water drain valve........................................................................................................ NO LEAK
Refuel coupling.....................................................................................................................CLOSED
Surge tank air inlet................................................................................................................. CLEAR
Fuel ventilation overpressure disc......................................................................................... INTACT
Navigation and Strobe lights......................................................................................... CONDITION
Sharklet........................................................................................................................... CONDITION

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010372.0001001 / 03 DEC 19


Applicable to: V2500

RH WING LEADING EDGE


Slats 2, 3, 4, 5................................................................................................................ CONDITION
Inner and outer cells magnetic fuel level................................................................................FLUSH

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 8/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Fuel water drain valve (outer cell, surge tank)................................................................... NO LEAK


Refuel coupling.....................................................................................................................CLOSED
Surge tank air inlet................................................................................................................. CLEAR
Fuel ventilation overpressure disc......................................................................................... INTACT
Navigation and Strobe lights......................................................................................... CONDITION
Wing tip........................................................................................................................... CONDITION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010372.0003001 / 03 DEC 19
Applicable to: CFM

RH WING LEADING EDGE


Slats 2, 3, 4, 5................................................................................................................ CONDITION
Magnetic fuel level.................................................................................................................. FLUSH
Fuel water drain valve........................................................................................................ NO LEAK
Refuel coupling.....................................................................................................................CLOSED
Surge tank air inlet................................................................................................................. CLEAR
Fuel ventilation overpressure disc......................................................................................... INTACT
Navigation and Strobe lights......................................................................................... CONDITION
Wing tip........................................................................................................................... CONDITION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010373.0001001 / 28 FEB 18
Applicable to: ALL

RH WING TRAILING EDGE


Static dischargers................................................................................................................... CHECK
Control surfaces..............................................................................................................CONDITION
Flaps and fairings........................................................................................................... CONDITION
Antennas on top of fuselage.............................................................................CHECK CONDITION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010374.0001001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: A319/20

RH L/G AND FUSELAGE


Chocks.............................................................................................................................. REMOVED
Wheels and tires.............................................................................................................CONDITION
Brakes and brake wear ind............................................................................................ CONDITION
Torque link damper  .................................................................................................CONDITION
Hydraulic lines........................................................................................................................ CHECK
Landing gear structure........................................................................................................... CHECK
Downlock springs................................................................................................................... CHECK
Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Ground hydraulic connection yellow.................................................................................... CLOSED

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 9/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Shroud fuel drain............................................................................................CONDITION/NO LEAK


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010374.0002001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: A321

RH L/G AND FUSELAGE


Chocks.............................................................................................................................. REMOVED
Wheels and tires.............................................................................................................CONDITION
Brakes and brake wear ind............................................................................................ CONDITION
Torque link damper.........................................................................................................CONDITION
Hydraulic lines........................................................................................................................ CHECK
Landing gear structure........................................................................................................... CHECK
Downlock springs................................................................................................................... CHECK
Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Ground hydraulic connection yellow.................................................................................... CLOSED
Water drain mast  .................................................................................................... CONDITION
Shroud fuel drain............................................................................................CONDITION/NO LEAK
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010375.0001001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: ALL

RH AFT FUSELAGE
RA Antennas...................................................................................................................CONDITION
Check that the RA antennas are clean.
Cargo door and selector panel.............................................................................................. CHECK
Bulk door  ........................................................................................................................ CHECK
Toilet service access door................................................................................................... CLOSED
Outflow valve.................................................................................................................. CONDITION
Drain mast ..................................................................................................................... CONDITION
Flight recorder access door ................................................................................................ CLOSED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010376.0001001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: ALL

TAIL
Stabilizer, elevator, fin, and rudder.................................................................................CONDITION
Static dischargers................................................................................................................... CHECK
Lower fuselage structure (tail impact on runway)...........................................................CONDITION

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 10/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010377.0001001 / 05 AUG 10


Applicable to: ALL

APU
Access doors........................................................................................................................CLOSED
Air intake......................................................................................................................... CONDITION
Drain...............................................................................................................CONDITION/NO LEAK
Oil cooler air outlet ................................................................................................................ CLEAR
Exhaust....................................................................................................................................CLEAR
Navigation light............................................................................................................... CONDITION
Fire extinguisher overpressure indication (red disc).......................................................... IN PLACE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010378.0001001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: ALL

LH AFT FUSELAGE
Stabilizer, elevator, fin, and rudder.................................................................................CONDITION
Potable water service door.................................................................................................. CLOSED
Ground hydraulic connection blue door............................................................................... CLOSED
Ground hydraulic connection green and reservoir filling door............................................. CLOSED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010379.0001001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: A319/20

LH LANDING GEAR
Chocks.............................................................................................................................. REMOVED
Wheels and tires.............................................................................................................CONDITION
Brakes and brake wear indicator....................................................................................CONDITION
Torque link damper  .................................................................................................CONDITION
Hydraulic lines........................................................................................................................ CHECK
Landing gear structure........................................................................................................... CHECK
Downlock springs................................................................................................................... CHECK
Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010379.0002001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: A321

LH LANDING GEAR
Chocks.............................................................................................................................. REMOVED
Wheels and tires.............................................................................................................CONDITION
Brakes and brake wear indicator....................................................................................CONDITION
Torque link damper.........................................................................................................CONDITION
Hydraulic lines........................................................................................................................ CHECK

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 11/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Landing gear structure........................................................................................................... CHECK


Downlock springs................................................................................................................... CHECK
Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010380.0001001 / 28 FEB 18
Applicable to: ALL

LH WING TRAILING EDGE


Flaps and fairing............................................................................................................. CONDITION
Control surfaces..............................................................................................................CONDITION
Static dischargers................................................................................................................... CHECK
Antennas on top of fuselage.............................................................................CHECK CONDITION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010381.0004001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: LEAP1A

LH WING LEADING EDGE


Sharklet........................................................................................................................... CONDITION
Navigation and Strobe lights...........................................................................................CONDITION
Surge tank air inlet................................................................................................................. CLEAR
Fuel ventilation overpressure disc......................................................................................... INTACT
Fuel water drain valve........................................................................................................ NO LEAK
Magnetic fuel level.................................................................................................................. FLUSH
Slats 2, 3, 4, 5................................................................................................................ CONDITION

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010381.0001001 / 03 DEC 19


Applicable to: V2500

LH WING LEADING EDGE


Wing tip........................................................................................................................... CONDITION
Navigation and Strobe lights...........................................................................................CONDITION
Surge tank air inlet................................................................................................................. CLEAR

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 12/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Fuel ventilation overpressure disc......................................................................................... INTACT


Fuel water drain valve........................................................................................................ NO LEAK
Inner and outer cell magnetic fuel level..................................................................................FLUSH
Slats 2, 3, 4, 5................................................................................................................ CONDITION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010381.0002001 / 03 DEC 19
Applicable to: CFM

LH WING LEADING EDGE


Wing tip........................................................................................................................... CONDITION
Navigation and Strobe lights...........................................................................................CONDITION
Surge tank air inlet................................................................................................................. CLEAR
Fuel ventilation overpressure disc......................................................................................... INTACT
Fuel water drain valve........................................................................................................ NO LEAK
Magnetic fuel level.................................................................................................................. FLUSH
Slats 2, 3, 4, 5................................................................................................................ CONDITION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010384.0015001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: CFM

ENG 1 LH SIDE
Oil fill access door................................................................................................................CLOSED
Thrust reversers................................................................................................. CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl doors................................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED
Drain mast......................................................................................................CONDITION/NO LEAK
Engine inlet and fan blades................................................................................................... CHECK
Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Pylon/access panel......................................................................................... CONDITION/CLOSED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010384.0012001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: V2500

ENG 1 LH SIDE
Oil fill access door................................................................................................................CLOSED
Master magnetic chip detector access door........................................................................ CLOSED
Thrust reversers................................................................................................. CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl doors................................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED
Drain mast......................................................................................................CONDITION/NO LEAK
Engine inlet and fan blades................................................................................................... CHECK
Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Pylon/access panel......................................................................................... CONDITION/CLOSED

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 13/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010384.0010001 / 17 MAY 17


Applicable to: LEAP1A

ENG 1 LH SIDE
Thrust reversers................................................................................................. CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl doors................................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl door latch flag..................................................................................CONDITION/CLOSED
Drain masts.................................................................................................... CONDITION/NO LEAK
Engine inlet and fan blades................................................................................................... CHECK
IDG oil level access door.....................................................................................................CLOSED
Starter valve override flapper door.........................................................................CHECK/CLOSED
Interphone jack flapper door  ..........................................................................CHECK/CLOSED
Pylon/access panel......................................................................................... CONDITION/CLOSED

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010386.0015001 / 17 MAY 17


Applicable to: CFM

ENG 1 RH SIDE
Vent inlet................................................................................................................................. CLEAR
Pressure relief/Start valve handle access door................................................................... CLOSED
Thrust reversers................................................................................................. CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl doors................................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED
Turbine exhaust...................................................................................................................... CLEAR
Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010386.0012001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: V2500

ENG 1 RH SIDE
Pressure relief/Start valve handle access door................................................................... CLOSED
Thrust reversers................................................................................................. CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl doors................................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 14/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Turbine exhaust...................................................................................................................... CLEAR


Safety pin.......................................................................................................................... REMOVED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010386.0010001 / 04 DEC 18
Applicable to: LEAP1A

ENG 1 RH SIDE
EEC blower inlet..................................................................................................................... CLEAR
Engine oil tank access door.................................................................................................CLOSED
Thrust reversers................................................................................................. CLOSED/LATCHED
Fan cowl doors................................................................................................... CLOSED/LATCHED
Turbine exhaust...................................................................................................................... CLEAR
Exhaust vent tube outlet................................................................................ CONDITION/NO LEAK

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010387.0001001 / 17 MAY 17


Applicable to: A319/20

LH CENTER WING
Slat 1...............................................................................................................................CONDITION
Wing leading edge ventilation intake  .............................................................................. CLEAR
Fuel water drain valves.......................................................................................................NO LEAK
Inner tank magnetic fuel......................................................................................................... FLUSH
Landing lights..................................................................................................................CONDITION
Hydraulic reservoir pressurization door............................................................................... CLOSED
RAT doors............................................................................................................................ CLOSED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-05-A-00010387.0002001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: A321

LH CENTER WING
Slat 1...............................................................................................................................CONDITION
Wing leading edge ventilation intake  .............................................................................. CLEAR
Fuel water drain valves.......................................................................................................NO LEAK
Magnetic fuel level.................................................................................................................. FLUSH

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 15/16
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Landing lights..................................................................................................................CONDITION
Hydraulic reservoir pressurization door............................................................................... CLOSED
RAT doors............................................................................................................................ CLOSED

PRO-NOR-SOP-05 P 16/16
←B 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

GENERAL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-00011153.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

Items marked by asterisks (*) are the only steps to be completed after a transit stop without flight
crew change. Otherwise, the new flight crew performs all the items.
The PF and PM should perform the cockpit preparation according to the panel scan sequence
defined below (Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-06 Flow Pattern), and the task sharing defined in the QRH
(Refer to QRH/Normal Procedures - Cockpit Preparation).

OVERHEAD PANEL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011155.0001001 / 31 JUL 13
Applicable to: ALL

WHITE LIGHTS ON THE OVERHEAD PANEL


 During the scan sequence of the overhead panel:
* ALL WHITE LIGHTS.......................................................................................... EXTINGUISH
It is a general rule to turn off all the white lights during the scan sequence; therefore, these
actions are not listed here.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00015476.0006001 / 05 NOV 20
Applicable to: ALL

RCDR
* RCDR GND CTL pb-sw............................................................................................................ ON
In order to perform the test, ensure that the PARK BRK is on.
LOUDSPEAKER VOLUME knob....................................................................... OFF (BOTH SIDES)
ACP INT/RAD sw (CAPT and F/O)..................................................................................SET to INT
INTERPHONE VOLUME RECEPTION KNOB (CAPT and F/O)....................................... RELEASE
Turn down the volume to the minimum.
CVR TEST pb..............................................................................................PRESS AND MAINTAIN
The CVR test is successful when an audio test signal (short tone) is heard.

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 1/28
A to B → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 2/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 3/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 4/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011158.0001001 / 06 MAR 17


Applicable to: ALL

EVAC
CAPT & PURS/CAPT sw ..................................................................................................AS RQRD
Set the CAPT & PURS/CAPT sw on the EVAC panel as per Company Policy.

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 5/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011159.0038001 / 04 NOV 20


Applicable to: OLD

ADIRS
* All IR MODE selector .............................................................................................................NAV
Align or realign IRS as appropriate. Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-60 ADIRS Operations.
Note: In order to prevent an erroneous data initialization, wait at least 12 min after power-up
and then select the ADIRS to NAV.
L2 A complete IRS alignment must be performed in the following cases:
‐ Before the first flight of the day, or
‐ When there is a crew change, or
‐ When the departure airport is located between latitudes 2 ° north and 2 ° south, or
‐ When the GPS is not available and the NAVAID coverage is poor on the expected route, or
‐ When the GPS is not available and the expected flight time is more than 3 h.
A fast IRS alignment must be performed if a complete IRS alignment is not necessary and the
difference between the IRS position and the FMGC position is at or above 5 NM (see MCDU
POSITION MONITOR page).
To perform an alignment, the aircraft must be stopped on ground. Do not align IRS during engine
start, or while the engines are running. In the case of aircraft movement during the IRS alignment,
the flight crew must perform a new full alignment.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011159.0009001 / 04 NOV 20
Applicable to: NEW

ADIRS
* All IR MODE selector .............................................................................................................NAV
Align or realign IRS as appropriate. Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-60 ADIRS Operations.
L2 A complete IRS alignment must be performed in the following cases:
‐ Before the first flight of the day, or
‐ When there is a crew change, or
‐ When the departure airport is located between latitudes 2 ° north and 2 ° south, or
‐ When the GPS is not available and the NAVAID coverage is poor on the expected route, or
‐ When the GPS is not available and the expected flight time is more than 3 h.
A fast IRS alignment must be performed if a complete IRS alignment is not necessary and the
difference between the IRS position and the FMGC position is at or above 5 NM (see MCDU
POSITION MONITOR page).

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 6/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

To perform an alignment, the aircraft must be stopped on ground. Do not align IRS during engine
start, or while the engines are running. In the case of aircraft movement during the IRS alignment,
the flight crew must perform a new full alignment.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011160.0001001 / 30 NOV 17
Applicable to: ALL

EXTERIOR LIGHTS
STROBE sw.............................................................................................................................. AUTO
BEACON sw................................................................................................................................ OFF
NAV & LOGO  sw....................................................................................................... AS RQRD
L2 Set to NAV & LOGO 1  the NAV & LOGO sw  , as required, to turn on the navigation and
logo lights (NAV & LOGO LT 2  is used only when NAV & LOGO LT 1  fails).
L1 REMAINING EXTERIOR LIGHTS......................................................................................AS RQRD
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011161.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

SIGNS
* SIGNS sw....................................................................................................................... ON/AUTO
* EMER EXIT LT selector......................................................................................................... ARM
Note: Leaving the EXIT selector or NO SMOKING selector or NO PORTABLE/ELEC DEVICE
selector  ON prevents the emergency batteries from charging.
If the CIDS has been programmed (option) for a non-smoking flight, NO SMOKING or
NO PORTABLE/ELEC DEVICE  signs are permanently on, with the EXIT sw or NO
SMOKING sw or NO PORTABLE/ELEC DEVICE sw  at AUTO (with permanent
charge of emergency batteries).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00010176.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

PROBE/WINDOW HEAT
PROBE/WINDOW HEAT pb....................................................................................... CHECK AUTO
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011162.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

CABIN PRESS
LDG ELEV knob....................................................................................................................... AUTO

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 7/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011163.0010001 / 05 DEC 17


Applicable to: CEO 320

AIR COND
* PACK FLOW selector.................................................................................................... AS RQRD
Select:
LO : If the number of occupants is below 141.
HI : For abnormally hot and humid conditions.
NORM : For all other normal operating cases.
If the APU is supplying, pack controllers select HI flow automatically, independent of the selector
position.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011163.0004001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: NEO

AIR COND
* PACK FLOW selector.................................................................................................... AS RQRD
Select:
LO : If the number of occupants is below 168.
HI : For abnormally hot and humid conditions.
NORM : For all other normal operating cases.
If the APU is supplying, pack controllers select HI flow automatically, independent of the selector
position.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011163.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: CEO A319

AIR COND
* PACK FLOW selector.................................................................................................... AS RQRD
Select:
LO : If the number of occupants is below 138.
HI : For abnormally hot and humid conditions.
NORM : For all other normal operating cases.
If the APU is supplying, pack controllers select HI flow automatically, independent of the selector
position.

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 8/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011163.0002001 / 05 DEC 17


Applicable to: CEO A321

AIR COND
* ECON FLOW pb............................................................................................................ AS RQRD
Select:
ON : ECON flow, if the number of occupants is below 168.
Off : For normal flow.
If the APU is supplying, pack controllers select 120 % of the normal flow automatically,
independent of the pushbutton position.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011164.0001001 / 09 APR 15
Applicable to: ALL

ELEC
Scan and check that there are no amber lights, except GEN FAULT lights.
ELEC pb (on the ECAM Control Panel).................................................................................PRESS
BAT 1 pb-sw and BAT 2 pb-sw....................................................................................OFF then ON
This action initiates a charging cycle of the batteries.
10 s after setting all BAT pb-sw ON, check on the ELEC SD page that the current charge of the
battery is below 60 A, and is decreasing.
 If the charge of at least one battery is not below 60 A:
Wait until the end of the charging cycle of the batteries and perform this check again.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011166.0003001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: A321

FUEL
CAUTION If the FUEL MODE SEL pb-sw is unduly left in the MAN position on ground, when
the CTR TK L XFR pb-sw and CTR TK R XFR pb-sw are not in the OFF position:
There is a possibility of fuel spillage. In this configuration, the center tank fuel
transfer will not stop when the wing tanks become full.
* FUEL MODE SEL pb-sw.........................................................................................CHECK AUTO
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011166.0002001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: CEO A320

FUEL
 If the center tank is less than 200 kg (440 lb) for the flight:
Apply the following procedure, if your airline is affected by FUEL CTR TK PUMPS LO PR
cautions on ground or in flight when the center tank is less than 200 kg (440 lb):

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 9/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

* FUEL MODE SEL pb-sw..................................................................................................MAN


* CTR TK PUMP 1 pb-sw and CTR TK PUMP 2 pb-sw..................................................... OFF
 If the center tank is NOT less than 200 kg (440 lb) for the flight:
CAUTION If the FUEL MODE SEL pb is unduly left in the MAN position on ground, when
the CTR TK PUMP 1 pb & CTR TK PUMP 2 pb are not in the OFF position:
There is a possibility of fuel spillage, if there are any hidden failures.
* FUEL MODE SEL pb........................................................................................CHECK AUTO
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011167.0001001 / 09 FEB 18
Applicable to: ALL

ENG 1 - ENG 2 FIRE


ENG 1 FIRE pb-sw and ENG 2 FIRE pb-sw...........................................CHECK IN and GUARDED
AGENT 1 light and AGENT 2 light ...............................................................................CHECK OFF
ENG 1 TEST pb and ENG 2 TEST pb......................................................... PRESS and MAINTAIN
L2 The flight crew should maintain the TEST pb pressed during the time of the test.
L1 TEST RESULT
Check that all ENG FIRE detection and extinguishing systems are operative:
‐ The continuous repetitive chime (CRC) sounds
‐ The MASTER WARN lights flash
‐ The ECAM displays the ENG 1 FIRE, ENG 2 FIRE alerts
‐ All ENG FIRE pb-sw come on red
‐ All SQUIB lights of the AGENT pb come on
‐ All DISCH lights of the AGENT pb come on
‐ All FIRE lights on the ENG MASTER panel come on.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011169.0001001 / 14 SEP 12
Applicable to: ALL

AUDIO SWITCHING PANEL


AUDIO SWITCHING selector ................................................................................................. NORM
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00010185.0001001 / 26 MAY 14
Applicable to: ALL

VENT
ALL LIGHTS...................................................................................................................CHECK OFF

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 10/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00022544.0003001 / 04 SEP 18


Applicable to: LEAP1A

ACT CONTROL PANEL


* ACT XFR rotary sel................................................................................................................. OFF
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011174.0001001 / 14 SEP 12
Applicable to: ALL

THIRD OCCUPANT AUDIO CONTROL PANEL


PA knob ...............................................................................................................................RECEPT
‐ This allows cabin attendant announcements to be recorded on the CVR.
‐ For proper recording, set volume at or above medium range.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-A-00011176.0001001 / 14 SEP 12
Applicable to: ALL

MAINTENANCE PANEL
ALL LIGHTS...................................................................................................................CHECK OFF

CTR INSTRUMENT PANEL


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-B-00011179.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: CEO

CTR INSTRUMENT PANEL - STBY INSTRUMENT


* STBY ASI........................................................................................................................... CHECK
* STBY ALTI (and STBY ALTI in meter  ).......................................................................CHECK
* STBY HORIZON.................................................................................................................CHECK
Check no flag - Erect if necessary.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-B-00011184.0001001 / 21 MAR 16
Applicable to: NEW

CTR INSTRUMENT PANEL - ISIS


* ISIS..................................................................................................................................... CHECK
‐ Adjust brightness, check IAS, altimeter readings, altimeter settings and attitude display.
‐ Check no flags - Reset attitude, if necessary.
Note: Use of the ISIS bugs function is not recommended (Refer to DSC-34-NAV-20 Bugs
Function)

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 11/28
← B to C → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-B-00011185.0009001 / 05 DEC 17


Applicable to: ALL

CLOCK
* CLOCK........................................................................................................................CHECK/SET
Note: 1. If the date is incorrect, set the date manually then set and keep the clock mode to
internal (INT) mode for the whole flight.
2. To comply with the time precision requirement (+/-1 s UTC) for ATC datalink
communication, the flight crew must either:
‐ Use the clock in GPS mode, or
‐ Use the clock in INT mode and synchronize the clock with the GPS at least one time
per day. This synchonization ensures that the UTC time drift is below +/- 1 s UTC.
For more information on the setting of the clock, Refer to DSC-31-55-10 General.
For more information on the use of the internal (INT) mode, Refer to DSC-31-55-20
Operation in Internal Mode.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-B-00011186.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

NOSEWHEEL STEERING
* A/SKID & N/W STRG sw.......................................................................................................... ON

PEDESTAL
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-C-00011187.0001001 / 28 NOV 19

ACP
INT knob ........................................................................................ PRESS OUT/VOLUME CHECK
Ensure sure that INT volume is turned up, to enable contact with the ground crew.
VHF ....................................................................................................................................... CHECK
Check transmission and reception.
HF (if required for flight).........................................................................................................CHECK
Check transmission and reception.
CAUTION ‐ Do not transmit on HF during refueling operations (i.e. refueling, defueling, fuel
transfer)
‐ Only perform HF radio checks when appropriate (i.e. no personnel in the
immediate vicinity).

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 12/28
← C to D → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-C-00011191.0001001 / 23 JUN 15

COCKPIT DOOR
If required by local Airworthiness Authorities:
ANN LT selector........................................................................................................................ TEST
Check that the OPEN and FAULT lights (on the pedestal), and the three LED lights (on the
overhead panel) come on.
ANN LT selector.......................................................................................................................... BRT
Check that all lights go off.
CKPT DOOR.................................................................................CHECK CORRECT OPERATION
‐ Set the COCKPIT DOOR sw to the UNLOCK position. Check that the door opens, and that the
OPEN light comes on
‐ Then, with the door fully open, release the COCKPIT DOOR sw (check that it returns to NORM
position). Close the door. Check that it is locked, and that the OPEN Indication goes off.
CKPT DOOR MECHANICAL OVERRIDE............................................................................. CHECK
Check that the door opens normally, and that it closes when the mechanical override is used.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-C-00011189.0001001 / 14 SEP 12

SWITCHING PANEL
All selectors................................................................................................................CHECK NORM
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-C-00011192.0001001 / 05 DEC 17

ENG
* THRUST lever ....................................................................................................................... IDLE
* ENG MASTER sw .................................................................................................................. OFF
* ENG MODE selector............................................................................................................NORM
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-C-00011195.0001001 / 05 DEC 17

PARKING BRK
* ACCU PRESS indicator..................................................................................................... CHECK
The ACCU PRESS indication must be in the green band. If required, use the electric pump on
yellow hydraulic system to recharge the brake accumulator.
WARNING Yellow and green hydraulic systems are pressurized from yellow electric pump.
Get ground crew clearance before using the electric pump.
* PARK BRK handle..................................................................................................... CHECK ON

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 13/28
←D→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

* BRAKES PRESS indicator................................................................................................. CHECK


Check for normal indications.
 If brakes are hot and chocks are in place:
* PARK BRK handle ...........................................................................................................OFF
This action increases the brake cooling.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-C-00011198.0001001 / 07 FEB 11

GRAVITY GEAR EXTN


GRAVITY GEAR EXTN....................................................................................... CHECK STOWED
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-C-00011199.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

ATC
* ATC ..................................................................................................................................... STBY
ATC and TCAS are on standby. To prevent possible interference to radar surveillance systems,
TCAS should not be selected before the holding point/lining up.
ALT RPTG ....................................................................................................................................ON
ATC SYS 1........................................................................................................................... SELECT
For RVSM operations (Refer to PRO-SPO-50 General), select SYS 1 if AP 1 is used, and SYS 2 if
AP 2 is used.
Only system 1 is available, in emergency electrical configuration.

RMP
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-00011202.0001001 / 30 JUN 14
Applicable to: ALL

RMP..................................................................................................................................... CHECK ON
Green NAV light.................................................................................................................CHECK OFF
SEL light.............................................................................................................................CHECK OFF
COM FREQUENCIES................................................................................................................... TUNE
Use VHF 1 for ATC (only VHF 1 is available in emergency electrical configuration), VHF 2 for ATIS
and company frequencies. VHF 3 is normally devoted to ACARS.

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 14/28
← D to E 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

ATC DATALINK COMMUNICATION


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-00013746.0002001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL

* MSG RECORD....................................................................................................................... ERASE


Press the ATC COMM key of the MCDU and display the MSG RECORD page. Then, erase the MSG
RECORD file.
Note: Erase the record of all CPDLC messages of the previous flight before starting a new flight
where CPDLC will be used. This avoids confusing CPDLC messages from the previous
flight with the ones of the current flight.

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 15/28
F 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

NAV CHARTS
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-00021888.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

* NAV CHARTS CLIPBOARD..............................................................................................PREPARE

FMGS PREPARATION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011226.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

At electrical power-up, the FMGSs and FCU run through various internal tests. Allow enough time
(3 min) for tests’ completion, and do not start to press pushbuttons until the tests are over. If the
“PLEASE WAIT” message appears, do not press any MCDU key until the message clears.
In the case of ACARS  operations, or EFB operations with SYNCHRO AVIONICS  , the
following actions are already performed in the section "FMGS Pre-Initialization" of the PRELIMINARY
COCKPIT PREPARATION procedure and do not need to be performed again:
‐ ENGINE & AIRCRAFT TYPE check
‐ FM database validity check
‐ Flight plan initialization:
• FLT NBR insertion
• FROM/TO insertion
Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-04 EFB/ACARS Init - FMGS Pre-Initialization - General
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011227.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

* ENGINE & AIRCRAFT TYPE................................................................................................ CHECK


Press the DATA key, and display the STATUS page (if not displayed).

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 16/28
G to H → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011228.0001001 / 04 DEC 18


Applicable to: THALES

* FM database validity.............................................................................................................. CHECK


‐ Check DATA BASE validity and stored WPT/NAVAIDS/RWY/ROUTES, if any. If applicable, review
the stored data for deletion decision.
‐ On Honeywell FMS, the double AIRAC cycle of the NDB has one day in common (AIRAC Cycle #1
Day 29 / AIRAC Cycle #2 Day 1). From Day 2 of AIRAC Cycle #2, the active database is no longer
valid and the message "CHECK DATA BASE CYCLE" will be triggered.
On the common day, select AIRAC Cycle #2 prior to the first flight of the day.

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011228.0002001 / 04 DEC 18


Applicable to: HONEYWELL

* FM database validity.............................................................................................................. CHECK


‐ Check DATA BASE validity and stored WPT/NAVAIDS/RWY/ROUTES, if any. If applicable, review
the stored data for deletion decision.
‐ On Thales FMS, if the "CHECK DATA BASE CYCLE" message triggers, the active database is no
longer valid. Therefore, on Day 1 of AIRAC Cycle #2, select AIRAC Cycle #2 prior to the first flight
of the day.

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011229.0001001 / 04 DEC 18


Applicable to: ALL

* NAVAID DESELECTION....................................................................................................AS RQRD


If NOTAMs warn of any unreliable or unserviceable DME or VOR/DME, access the SELECTED
NAVAIDS page, and deselect the related NAVAID.

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 17/28
←H→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011231.0002001 / 16 MAR 11


Applicable to: THALES

* FLIGHT PLAN INITIALIZATION......................................................................................COMPLETE


‐ Press the INIT key
‐ Insert CO RTE or city pair, and check FROM/TO
‐ Check/modify ALTN/CO RTE
‐ Enter flight number
Note: For ATC needs, the crew should enter exactly the entire flight number, as shown on the
ICAO flight plan, without inserting any space, on the MCDU INIT page.
‐ Enter (and/or check) cost index
‐ Enter intended initial CRZ FL, or check if it was already supplied by the database.
Modify it, if necessary, taking into account ATC constraints or expected gross weight
‐ Check and modify CRZ FL TEMP and tropopause level to agree with forecast
‐ Check latitude/longitude.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011231.0003001 / 20 AUG 12
Applicable to: HONEYWELL

* FLIGHT PLAN INITIALIZATION......................................................................................COMPLETE


‐ Press the INIT key
‐ Insert CO RTE or city pair, and check FROM/TO
‐ Check/modify ALTN/CO RTE
‐ Enter flight number
Note: For ATC needs, the crew should enter exactly the entire flight number, as shown on the
ICAO flight plan, without inserting any space, on the MCDU INIT page.
‐ Enter (and/or check) cost index
‐ Enter intended initial CRZ FL, or check if it was already supplied by the database.
Modify it, if necessary, taking into account ATC constraints or expected gross weight
‐ Check and modify CRZ FL TEMP and tropopause level to agree with forecast
‐ Enter (and/or check) the expected ground temperature for take off (GND TEMP) 

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 18/28
←H→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

‐ PRESS IRS INIT prompt


‐ Check alignment latitude/longitude.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011232.0011001 / 09 NOV 17
Applicable to: THALES

* ADIRS POSITION INITIALIZATION.................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE


Confirm or insert position coordinates for the IRS alignment. Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-60 FMGS
Preparation.
• Between latitude 73 ° and 82 °, the IRS alignment should last at least 15 min.
After the start of the IRS alignment procedure, wait 15 min. Then press the ALIGN IRS prompt.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011232.0001001 / 09 NOV 17
Applicable to: HONEYWELL

* ADIRS POSITION INITIALIZATION.................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE


Confirm or insert position coordinates for the IRS alignment. Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-60 FMGS
Preparation.
L2
IRS Alignment Based on GPS  Position available:
The position initialization is automatic. The position for the initialization of the IRS is the GPS
position. However, the flight crew can manually override the automatic position initialization. The
IRS crosschecks the flight crew's manual entry with the GPS position.
IRS Alignment Based on GPS  Position not available:
Apply the manual position initialization procedure.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011233.0015001 / 20 JUL 15
Applicable to: ALL

* F-PLN A page...........................................................................................COMPLETE AND CHECK


If CO RTE has been inserted, the F-PLN should automatically include the preferential or probable
takeoff runway approach and landing runway, associated SIDs, STARs, transition and en-route
waypoints. However some databases will only include departure and arrival airport IDENTs and
en-route waypoints.

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 19/28
←H→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

The flight crew must check, modify, or insert (as applicable) the F-PLN in the following order,
according to the data given by ATIS, ATC, or MET:
‐ Lateral revision at departure airport. Select RWY, then SID, then TRANS using scroll keys.
Note: On the MCDU departure page, select only a runway associated with an ILS or NO
NAVAIDS.
‐ Lateral revision at WPT for ROUTE modification if needed. (Refer to DSC-22_20-30-10-05 Lateral
Revisions).
‐ Vertical revision. Check or enter climb speed limit, constraints according to ATC clearance. Enter
step altitude as appropriate.
* WINDS.................................................................................................................AS APPROPRIATE
Choose between using trip wind and the forecast wind for CLB, CRZ and DES phases.(Refer to
DSC-22_20-30-20-05 Flight Phases).
* F-PLN .................................................................................................................................... CHECK
‐ Check the F-PLN using F-PLN page and ND PLAN mode versus the computer (paper) flight plan
or navigation chart.
‐ Check DIST TO DEST along the F-PLN. Compare it with the total distance computed for the flight
with the computer (paper) flight plan.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011234.0001001 / 18 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL

* SECONDARY FLIGHT PLAN............................................................................. AS APPROPRIATE


This is routinely a copy of the active flight plan. However, consideration may be given to the
following:
a. Copy the active F-PLN, but modify it at a suitable WPT for an immediate return to the departure
airfield in the event of, for example, engine failure
b. If weather is below landings minima at the departure airfield, the secondary flight plan should be
that required for a diversion immediately after takeoff
c. If there is a chance of a change in runway or SID during taxi, prepare for it by copying the active
flight plan and making the necessary modifications.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011235.0001001 / 04 SEP 18
Applicable to: ALL

* RADIO NAV............................................................................................................................CHECK
‐ Check the VOR, ILS / GLS  / MLS  , and ADF  tuned by the FMGC
‐ Modify them if required, and check that the correct identifier is displayed on the ND and PFD
(VOR, ILS / GLS  / MLS  ). If unsatisfactory, go through the audio check. For GLS  /
MLS  , no audio check is necessary.

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 20/28
←H→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

CAUTION Do not enter an IDENT or channel associated with a MLS  .


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011238.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: THALES

GROSS WEIGHT INSERTION (INIT B PAGE);


* ZFWCG/ZFW..................................................................................................................... INSERT
* BLOCK FUEL.....................................................................................................................INSERT
CAUTION The characteristic speeds displayed on the MCDU (green dot, F, S, VLS) are
computed from the ZFW and ZFWCG entered by the crew on the MCDU.
Therefore, this data must be carefully checked (Captain’s responsibility).
‐ The flight crew should insert the weights after completing all other insertions. This is to avoid
cycles of prediction computations at each change in flight plan, constraints, etc.
‐ If ZFWCG and ZFW are unavailable, it is acceptable to enter the expected values in order to
obtain predictions. Similarly, the flight crew may enter the expected fuel on board, if refueling
has not been completed at that time.
‐ If ZFWCG, ZFW, and BLOCK FUEL are inserted, the FMS will provide all predictions, as well as
the EXTRA fuel, if any.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011238.0003001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: HONEYWELL

GROSS WEIGHT INSERTION (INIT B PAGE);


* ZFW/ZFWCG..................................................................................................................... INSERT
* BLOCK FUEL.....................................................................................................................INSERT
CAUTION The characteristic speeds displayed on the MCDU (green dot, F, S, VLS) are
computed from the ZFW and ZFWCG entered by the crew on the MCDU.
Therefore, this data must be carefully checked (Captain’s responsibility).
‐ The flight crew should insert the weights after completing all other insertions. This is to avoid
cycles of prediction computations at each change in flight plan, constraints, etc.
‐ If ZFW and ZFWCG are unavailable, it is acceptable to enter the expected values in order to
obtain predictions. Similarly, the flight crew may enter the expected fuel on board, if refueling
has not been completed at that time.
‐ If ZFW, ZFWCG, and BLOCK FUEL are inserted, the FMS will provide all predictions, as well as
the EXTRA fuel, if any.

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 21/28
←H→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011240.0001001 / 31 AUG 18


Applicable to: ALL

TAKEOFF DATA INSERTION (PERF TAKEOFF PAGE):


The PF inserts the takeoff data in the PERF TAKEOFF page of the MCDU.
* T.O SHIFT........................................................................................................INSERT AS RQRD
If the aircraft takes off from an intersection, insert a T.O shift value (even when GPS PRIMARY is
active) to increase flight crew awareness of the runway length reduction.
* V1, VR, V2.........................................................................................................................INSERT
* FLX TO TEMP................................................................................................................... INSERT
* THR RED/ACC altitude......................................................................................... SET or CHECK
* ENG OUT ACC altitude.........................................................................................SET or CHECK
* FLAPS/THS reminder........................................................................................................ INSERT
When entered in the MCDU, the THS value will be used to trigger the F/CTL PITCH
TRIM/MCDU/CG DISAGREE ECAM caution, if appropriate.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00011243.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

CLIMB, CRUISE, DESCENT, SPEED PRESELECTION


* PRESET SPEEDS..........................................................................................................AS RQRD
If the flight is cleared for a close-in turn or close-in altitude constraint, the flight crew may preselect
green dot speed on the PERF CLB page. Once the CLB phase is active, the preselected speed
will be displayed in the FCU speed window and on the PFD (blue symbol). Once the turn is
completed or the altitude cleared, the pilot will resume the managed speed profile by pressing the
SPD selector on the FCU.
Similarly the pilot may select a CRZ MACH number on the PERF CRZ page (constant CRZ Mach
segment, for example). When the CRZ phase is active, the preselected CRZ MACH number will
be displayed in the FCU speed window and on the PFD. When ECON MACH number may be
resumed, the crew presses the FCU SPD selector.
In either of the above cases, the pilot may cancel the CLB or CRZ preselected SPD/MACH prior to
activating the related phase, by selecting ECON on the PERF CLB or CRZ pages.
SPD LIM is defaulted to 250 kt below 10 000 ft in the managed speed profile. This may be either
cleared or modified on the VERT REV page at the origin (or a climb waypoint).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-D-00015496.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

CHECK OF FMGS PREPARATION:


For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-COCKPIT PREPARATION-FMGS Preparation

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 22/28
←H→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

* FMS PREPARATION......................................................................................................... CHECK


After the PF prepares the FMS, the PM checks all the data entered in the FMS. This check
includes a crosscheck of performance data displayed on the PM’s EFB with the FMS PERF T.O
page.
* EFB/MCDU GREEN DOT.............................................................................................COMPARE
The PM compares Green Dot speed computed by the FMGS and the Green Dot speed computed
using the TAKEOFF application. A discrepancy indicates a difference in the TOW used in both
systems (EFB/FMGS).

GLARESHIELD
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-E-00020832.0001001 / 27 FEB 18

EFIS CONTROL PANEL


* BAROMETRIC REFERENCE.................................................................................................. SET
‐ Set QNH (or QFE  ) on the EFIS control panel and on the standby altimeter
‐ Check the barometric reference and altitude indications on the PFDs and on the standby
altimeter.
The maximum difference is:
±20 ft between both PFDs
And depending on the aircraft configuration:
±100 ft between ISIS  and PFDs, or
±300 ft between mechanical standby altimeter and PFDs.
* FD................................................................................................................................ CHECK ON
* ILS/LS............................................................................................................................. AS RQRD
* ND MODE and RANGE ................................................................................................AS RQRD
* ADF/VOR sw .................................................................................................................AS RQRD
Display VOR and ADF pointers as needed.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-E-00011248.0001001 / 05 DEC 17

FCU
* SPD MACH window......................................................................................................... DASHED
* HDG V/S -TRK FPA pb................................................................................................... HDG V/S
* ALT window..................................................................... INITIAL EXPECTED CLEARANCE ALT
Note: Do not engage the autothrust on ground, as it may generate the AUTO FLT A/THR OFF
warning at engine start.

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 23/28
← H to I 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

LATERAL CONSOLES
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-00011249.0002001 / 04 NOV 20
Applicable to: ALL

WARNING To prevent hearing damage to the ground crew connected to the intercom system,
inform them that a loud noise may be heard in the headset when performing the
oxygen mask test.
 On the mask stowage box of each occupied station:
OXYGEN MASK TEST...................................................................................................PERFORM
L2 For a detailed test of the mask, Refer to DSC-35-20-30 How to Test the Mask.
L1
 On the DOOR/OXY SD page:
REGUL LO PR indication...................................................................... CHECK NOT DISPLAYED
The crew must perform this check after having checked all masks. It ensures that the LP valve is
open. Due to residual pressure between the LP valve and the oxygen masks, an LP valve failed
in the closed position may not be detected during the oxygen mask test.

INSTRUMENT PANELS
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-00011252.0001001 / 28 NOV 19
Applicable to: OLD

PFD and ND brightness knob................................................................................................AS RQRD


Check the ND outer ring is set to maximum brightness (radar/terrain display).
LOUDSPEAKER knob .................................................................................................................... SET
Set the LOUDSPEAKER knob around the 1 o’clock position.
* PFD.........................................................................................................................................CHECK
‐ Check PFD/ND not transferred.
‐ Check for correct display, when ATT and HDG are available.
‐ Check IAS, FMA, initial target ALT, altimeter readings, VSI, altimeter settings, heading and attitude
display.
* ND...........................................................................................................................................CHECK
‐ Check for correct display.
‐ Crosscheck MAG HDG indications on the ND and DDRMI.
‐ Check heading, initial waypoint, VOR ADF indications.

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 24/28
J to K → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

INSTRUMENT PANELS
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-00011252.0002001 / 28 NOV 19
Applicable to: NEW

PFD and ND brightness knob................................................................................................AS RQRD


Check the ND outer ring is set to maximum brightness (radar/terrain display).
LOUDSPEAKER knob .................................................................................................................... SET
Set the LOUDSPEAKER knob around the 1 o’clock position.
* PFD.........................................................................................................................................CHECK
‐ Check PFD/ND not transferred.
‐ Check for correct display, when ATT and HDG are available.
‐ Check IAS, FMA, initial target ALT, altimeter readings, VSI, altimeter settings, heading and attitude
display.
* ND...........................................................................................................................................CHECK
‐ Check for correct display.
‐ Check heading, initial waypoint, VOR ADF indications.

ECAM CONTROL PANEL


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-00011190.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

ECAM CONTROL PANEL


* PRESS pb ......................................................................................................................... PRESS
Check that the CAB PRESS page displays LDG ELEV AUTO, to confirm the correct position of the
LDG ELEV knob.
* STS pb ...............................................................................................................................PRESS
Check that INOP SYS display is compatible with MEL.
If a message is displayed in MAINTENANCE STATUS, Refer to MMEL/MI-00-08 ECAM and
MAINTENANCE STATUS.

ADIRS
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-00011253.0002001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

* IRS ALIGN..............................................................................................................................CHECK
On the POSITION MONITOR page, check that the IRS are in NAV mode, and check that the
distance between each IRS and the FMS position is lower than 5 NM. Select ND in ROSE-NAV or

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 25/28
← K to M → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

ARC mode, and confirm that the aircraft position is consistent with the position of the airport, the SID
and the surrounding NAVAIDs.

TAKEOFF BRIEFING
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-00011256.0001001 / 20 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

* TAKEOFF BRIEFING........................................................................................................PERFORM

PC DEDICATED TO MAINTENANCE 
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-00011258.0001001 / 07 FEB 11
Applicable to: ALL

Check that the Personal Computer (PC) dedicated to maintenance use and located in front of lower
stowage at RH rear corner is stowed.
Check that the light of its manual switch is off. If not, switch it off.
Check that its associated printer located in front of RH rear of the cockpit is stowed.

FLOW PATTERN
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-06-00020280.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

COCKPIT PREPARATION - FLOW PATTERN


The scan pattern varies, depending on the pilot status, i.e PF, PM, CM1, or CM2, and the areas of
responsibility:
1. Overhead panel
2. Center instrument panel
3. Pedestal
4. FMGS preparation, and when both pilots are seated:
5. Glareshield
6. Lateral consoles and CM1/CM2 panels.

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 26/28
← M to P → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 27/28
←P 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - COCKPIT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Intentionally left blank

PRO-NOR-SOP-06 P 28/28
29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - BEFORE PUSHBACK OR START

BEFORE START CLEARANCE


Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-A-00021624.0001001 / 05 DEC 17

LOADSHEET
FINAL LOADSHEET...............................................................................................................CHECK
Both crew members carefully check the Load and Trim Sheet (LTS), particularly for gross errors.
Make sure that the load sheet data is correct (e.g correct flight, correct aircraft, dry operating
index, configuration, Fuel on Board,etc.).
ZFW/ZFWCG............................................................................................................CHECK/REVISE
The PF compares the ZFW and the ZFWCG with the previously-entered data, and adjust if
necessary.
ZFW/ZFWCG............................................................................................................. CROSSCHECK
The PM crosschecks the ZFW and the ZFWCG entered in the FMS
Check that the takeoff CG is within LTS operational limits.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-A-00011255.0009001 / 09 JUN 15

FOB............................................................................................................................................ CHECK
‐ Check that ECAM fuel on board corresponds to the F-PLN.
‐ Check that fuel imbalance is within limits.
‐ Crosscheck that the sum of the Fuel On Board (FOB) recorded at the end of the last flight and
the fuel uplift (if any) is consistent with the current FOB. If an abnormal discrepancy is found, a
maintenance action is due.
FOB after refuelling: Abnormal discrepancy above:
Up to 6 tons (13200 lb) 400 kg (900 lb)
Between 6 tons (13200 lb) and 12 tons (26500 lb) 500 kg (1100 lb)
More than 12 tons (26500 lb) 600 kg (1300 lb)

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-A-00010189.0002001 / 05 DEC 17

TAKEOFF DATA
 If takeoff conditions changed:
For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-BEFORE PUSHBACK OR START-Takeoff
Data
FINAL TAKEOFF PERF DATA............................................................................. RECOMPUTE
The PF and the PM independently compute again the takeoff performance data.

PRO-NOR-SOP-07 P 1/6
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - BEFORE PUSHBACK OR START

FMS TAKEOFF DATA.................................................................................................... REVISE


The PF revises the takeoff data in the FMS.
If the flight crew uses the optimum configuration option for the computation, they should pay
specific attention to changes to the configuration of the slats/flaps at takeoff.
FMS REVISED TAKEOFF PERF DATA.............................................................CROSSCHECK
The PM crosschecks the performance data displayed on the PM's EFB with the FMS PERF
T.O page.
EFB/MCDU GREEN DOT.......................................................................................... COMPARE
The PM compares Green Dot speed computed by the FMGS and the Green Dot speed
computed using the TAKEOFF application. A discrepancy indicates a difference in the TOW
used in both systems (EFB/FMGS).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-A-00010190.0001001 / 04 MAR 14

SEATING POSITION
SEATING POSITION............................................................................................................ ADJUST
The seat is correctly adjusted, when the pilot’s eyes are in line with the red and white balls.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-A-00010192.0001001 / 23 DEC 14

MCDU
FMS PERF TO page............................................................................................................ SELECT
It is recommended to display the PERF TO page on the PF side.
FMS F-PLN page..................................................................................................................SELECT
It is recommended to display the F-PLN page on the PM side
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-A-00010193.0001001 / 17 MAR 16

ELEC
EXT PWR....................................................................................................................CHECK AVAIL
WARNING Disconnection of the external power with the EXT PWR pb-sw ON may cause
injury to the ground engineer. Request disconnection of the external power only
with the EXT PWR pb-sw AVAIL.
EXT PWR DISCONNECTION........................................................................................... REQUEST
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-A-00010194.0001001 / 12 FEB 13

BEFORE START CHECKLIST DOWN TO THE LINE


BEFORE START CHECKLIST down to the line.............................................................COMPLETE

PRO-NOR-SOP-07 P 2/6
←A 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - BEFORE PUSHBACK OR START

AT START CLEARANCE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-B-00010197.0001001 / 04 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

PUSHBACK/START UP CLEARANCE
PUSHBACK/START CLEARANCE....................................................................................... OBTAIN
Obtain ATC pushback/startup clearance.
Obtain ground crew clearance.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-B-00015568.0001001 / 20 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL

ATC...................................................................................................................SET FOR OPERATION


ATC is set in accordance with airport requirements.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-B-00010199.0002001 / 04 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

WINDOWS AND DOORS


WINDOWS and DOORS........................................................................................ CHECK CLOSED
‐ To ensure that the sliding window is correctly closed and locked, push the handle of the sliding
window fully forward to the closed position, and check that the red indicator is visible
‐ Check, on the ECAM lower display, that all the aircraft doors are closed
‐ When required by local airworthiness authorities, check that the cockpit door is closed and
locked (no cockpit door open/fault indication).
If entry is requested, identify the person requesting entry before unlocking the door. With the
cockpit door sw on NORM, the cockpit door is closed and locked. If entry is requested from the
cabin, and if no further action is performed by the pilot, the cabin crew will be able to unlock the
door by using the emergency access procedure. Except for crew entry/exit, the cockpit door
should remain closed until engine shutdown.
SLIDES.....................................................................................................................CHECK ARMED
‐ Check, on the ECAM lower display, that all slides are armed.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-B-00010200.0001001 / 04 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

EXTERIOR LIGHTS
BEACON sw.................................................................................................................................. ON

PRO-NOR-SOP-07 P 3/6
B→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - BEFORE PUSHBACK OR START
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-B-00010201.0001001 / 04 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

THRUST LEVERS
THRUST LEVERS...................................................................................................................... IDLE
CAUTION Engines will start, regardless of the thrust lever position; thrust will rapidly
increase to the corresponding thrust lever position, causing a hazardous situation,
if thrust levers are not at IDLE.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-B-00016807.0001001 / 06 SEP 16
Applicable to: ALL

ACCU PRESSURE
ACCU PRESS indicator......................................................................................................... CHECK
The ACCU PRESS indication must be in the green band. If required, use the electric pump on
yellow hydraulic system to recharge the brake accumulator.
WARNING Yellow and green hydraulic systems are pressurized from yellow electric pump.
Get ground crew clearance before using the electric pump.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-B-00010202.0002001 / 24 NOV 15
Applicable to: ALL

PARKING BRAKE AND NOSEWHEEL STEERING


 If pushback is not required:
PARK BRK handle................................................................................................... CHECK ON
BRAKES PRESS indicator.............................................................................................. CHECK
Check for normal indications.
BEFORE START CHECKLIST below the line..........................................................COMPLETE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-B-00010198.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: OLD

 If pushback is required:
N/W STRG DISC MEMO............................................................................... CHECK DISPLAYED
In case of pushback (conventional or towbarless), the nosewheel steering selector bypass pin
must be in the tow position. The ECAM NW STRG DISC, or N WHEEL STEERG DISC memos
indicate this to the flight crew.

PRO-NOR-SOP-07 P 4/6
←B→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - BEFORE PUSHBACK OR START

CAUTION If the ECAM does not display the N WHEEL STEERG DISC memo, but the
ground crew confirms that the tow pin is in the towing position, the flight crew
should not start the engine during pushback. This is to avoid possible nose
landing gear damage upon green hydraulic pressurization.
To dispatch the aircraft in such a case, Refer to MMEL/MI-32-51 NWS Electrical
Deactivation Box.
In case of a powerpush by the main landing gear, the nosewheel steering selector should remain
in the normal position to steer the aircraft (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-MISC-D Pushback with
Power Push Unit via the Main Landing Gear - Procedure 1/2).
BEFORE START CHECKLIST below the line............................................................. COMPLETE
PARK BRK handle ...................................................................................................................OFF
CAUTION Do not use brakes during pushback, unless required due to an emergency.
 When pushback is completed:
PARK BRK handle ..............................................................................................................ON
BRAKE PRESS indicator.............................................................................................. CHECK
Check for normal indications.
Ask the ground crew for towbar disconnection.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-07-B-00010198.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: NEW

 If pushback is required:
N/W STRG DISC MEMO............................................................................... CHECK DISPLAYED
In case of pushback (conventional or towbarless), the nosewheel steering selector bypass pin
must be in the tow position. The ECAM’s NW STRG DISC, or N WHEEL STEERG DISC memos
indicate this to the flight crew.
CAUTION If the ECAM does not display the N WHEEL STEERG DISC memo, but the
ground crew confirms that the tow pin is in the towing position, the flight crew
should not start the engine during pushback. This is to avoid possible nose
landing gear damage upon yellow hydraulic pressurization.
To dispatch the aircraft in such a case, Refer to MMEL/MI-32-51 NWS Electrical
Deactivation Box.
In case of a powerpush by the main landing gear, the nosewheel steering selector should remain
in the normal position to steer the aircraft (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-MISC-D Pushback with
Power Push Unit via the Main Landing Gear - Procedure 1/2).
BEFORE START CHECKLIST below the line............................................................. COMPLETE

PRO-NOR-SOP-07 P 5/6
←B→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
FLIGHT CREW
OPERATING MANUAL - BEFORE PUSHBACK OR START

PARK BRK handle ...................................................................................................................OFF


CAUTION Do not use the brakes during pushback, unless required due to an emergency.
 When pushback is completed:
PARK BRK handle ..............................................................................................................ON
BRAKE PRESS indicator.............................................................................................. CHECK
Check for normal indications.
Ask the ground crew for towbar disconnection.

PRO-NOR-SOP-07 P 6/6
←B 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
OPERATING MANUAL

PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 1/12
A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
OPERATING MANUAL

AUTOMATIC ENGINE START


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-08-00010162.0002001 / 31 AUG 17
Applicable to: CFM

Use the automatic engine start procedure in most circumstances. However, if the start aborts due
to insufficient starter inlet air pressure (e.g. on high airfields, or in case of low pressure from an
external pneumatic power group), it is recommended to use the manual start procedure, instead the
automatic procedure.
If, during the engine start, the ground crew reports a fuel leak from the engine drain mast, run the
engine at idle for 5 min. If the leak disappears during these 5 min, the aircraft can be dispatched
without maintenance action. If the leak is still present after 5 min, shut down the engine and request
the maintenance personnel to investigate the leakage source.
ENG MODE selector .......................................................................................................... IGN/START
The lower ECAM displays the ENG SD page.
ENGINE 2 START..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
Engine 2 is usually started first. It powers the yellow hydraulic system, that pressurizes the parking
brake.

PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 2/12
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
OPERATING MANUAL

ENG MASTER 2................................................................................................................................ON


‐ Do not set the ENG MASTER 2 lever to ON before all amber crosses and messages have
disappeared on the engine parameters (upper ECAM display).
‐ Parameter callouts are not mandatory.
‐ In case the electrical power supply is interrupted during the start sequence (indicated by the loss
of ECAM DUs), abort the start by setting to OFF the ENG MASTER 2 lever. Then, perform a 30 s
dry crank.
ON ECAM UPPER DISPLAY ON ECAM LOWER DISPLAY
N2 increases Corresponding start valve inline.
Bleed pressure indication green.
Oil pressure increases.
At 16 % N2 Indication of the active igniter (A or B).
At 22 % N2
‐ FF increases (1)
15 s (maximum) after fuel is on
‐ EGT increases
‐ N1 increases
At 50 % N2 Start valve starts closing. (It is fully closed between 50 %
and 56 % N2).
Igniter indication off.
(1)  With the current ECU standard, the FF indication may be crossed up to approximately 200 kg/h
(440 lb/h).
ENG IDLE PARAMETERS.........................................................................................................CHECK
At ISA sea level : N1 about 19.5 %
N2 about 58.5 %
EGT about 390 °C
FF about 275 kg/h (600 lb/h)
Grey background on N2 indication disappears.
ENGINE 1 START..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
ENG MASTER 1................................................................................................................................ON
Same procedure as for engine 2.
Both pack valves reopen with 30 s delay after the second engine N2 is above 50 %.
Note: A PTU FAULT is triggered, if the last engine is started within 40 s following the end of the
cargo doors operation. Refer to PRO-ABN-HYD HYD PTU FAULT.

PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 3/12
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
OPERATING MANUAL

PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 4/12
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
OPERATING MANUAL

AUTOMATIC ENGINE START


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-08-00010162.0056001 / 31 AUG 17
Applicable to: V2500

Use the automatic engine start procedure in most circumstances. However, if the start aborts due
to insufficient starter inlet air pressure (e.g. on high airfields, or in case of low pressure from an
external pneumatic power group), it is recommended to use the manual start procedure, instead the
automatic procedure.
ENG MODE selector .......................................................................................................... IGN/START
The lower ECAM displays the ENG SD page.
ENGINE 2 START..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
Engine 2 is usually started first. It powers the yellow hydraulic system, that pressurizes the parking
brake.
ENG MASTER 2................................................................................................................................ON
‐ Do not set the ENG MASTER 2 lever to ON before all amber crosses, except on N1 and N2, and
messages, have disappeared on the engine parameters (upper ECAM display).
‐ Parameter callouts are not mandatory.
‐ In case the electrical power supply is interrupted during the start sequence (indicated by the loss
of ECAM DUs), abort the start by setting to OFF the ENG MASTER 2 lever. Then, perform a 30 s
dry crank.

PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 5/12
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
OPERATING MANUAL

ON ECAM UPPER DISPLAY ON ECAM LOWER DISPLAY


N2 increases Corresponding start valve inline.
Bleed pressure indication green.
Oil pressure increases.
Indication of the active igniter (A or B).
30 s after ENG 2 MASTER sw is ON:
‐ FF increases.

20 s (maximum) after fuel is on


‐ EGT increases
‐ N1 increases prior to 34 % N2.
At 43 % N2 Igniter indication off.
Slightly above 43 % N2 Start valve crossline.

Note: When the FADEC detects an impending hung start or hot start, the FADEC applies an
automatic recovery sequence without an ECAM message. The crew will notice that dual
ignition (A+B) is applied, and that fuel will be commanded OFF, and then re-commanded
ON within 0.5 s. It is not necessary for the crew to shut down the engine.
 When idle is reached (AVAIL indication is displayed):
ENG IDLE PARAMETERS.................................................................................................. CHECK
At ISA sea level : EPR about 1.01
N1about 21.4 %
N2 about 57.8 %
EGT about 414 °C
FF about350 kg/h (775 lb/h)
ENGINE 1 START....................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
ENG MASTER 1......................................................................................................................... ON
Same procedure as for engine 2.
Note: A PTU FAULT is triggered, if the last engine is started within 40 s following the end of
the cargo doors operation. Refer to PRO-ABN-HYD HYD PTU FAULT.

AUTOMATIC ENGINE START


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-08-00010162.0063001 / 31 AUG 17
Applicable to: LEAP1A

Use the automatic engine start procedure in most circumstances. However, if the start aborts due
to insufficient starter inlet air pressure (e.g. on high airfields, or in case of low pressure from an
external pneumatic power group), it is recommended to use the manual start procedure, instead of
the automatic procedure.
If, during the engine start, the ground crew reports a fuel leak from the engine drain mast, run the
engine at idle for 5 min. If the leak disappears during these 5 min, the aircraft can be dispatched

PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 6/12
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
OPERATING MANUAL

without maintenance action. If the leak is still present after 5 min, shut down the engine and request
the maintenance personnel to investigate the leakage source.
ENG MODE selector .......................................................................................................... IGN/START
The lower ECAM displays the ENG SD page.
ENGINE 2 START..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
Engine 2 is usually started first. It powers the yellow hydraulic system, that pressurizes the parking
brake.
ENG MASTER 2................................................................................................................................ON
‐ Do not set the ENG MASTER 2 lever to ON before all amber crosses and messages have
disappeared on the engine parameters (upper ECAM display).
‐ Parameter callouts are not mandatory.
‐ In case the electrical power supply is interrupted during the start sequence (indicated by the loss
of ECAM DUs), abort the start by setting to OFF the ENG MASTER 2 lever. Then, perform a 30 s
dry crank.
‐ Depending on the engine thermal state, the FADEC can command an automatic dry cranking
before the start of the engine. The dry cranking may last up to approximately one minute. During
the dry cranking, the FADEC logic limits the maximum N2 to 30 %. During the dry cranking, the
vibration level increases but remains below the amber display limit in normal operating conditions.
ON ECAM UPPER DISPLAY ON ECAM LOWER DISPLAY
N2 increases Corresponding start valve inline.
Bleed pressure indication green.
Oil pressure increases.
Indication of the active igniter (A or B).
Above 20 % N2, when the automatic dry cranking is
completed
‐ FF increases
15 s (maximum) after fuel is on
‐ EGT increases
‐ N2 increases
At 55 % N2 Igniter indication off.
At 63 % N2 Start valve starts closing.

 When idle is reached (AVAIL indication is displayed):


ENG IDLE PARAMETERS.................................................................................................. CHECK
At ISA sea level : N1 about 19 %
N2 about 68 %
EGT about 520 °C
FF about 290 kg/h (650 lb/h)
Grey background on N2 indication disappears.

PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 7/12
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
OPERATING MANUAL

ENGINE 1 START....................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE


ENG MASTER 1......................................................................................................................... ON
Same procedure as for engine 2.
Both pack valves reopen with 60 s delay after the second engine thrust is at or above idle.
Note: A PTU FAULT is triggered, if the last engine is started within 40 s following the end of
the cargo doors operation. Refer to PRO-ABN-HYD HYD PTU FAULT.

PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 8/12
←A 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
OPERATING MANUAL

GROUND RUN UP - DANGER AREAS


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-08-00010163.0006001 / 06 JAN 16
Applicable to: CFM

PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 10/12
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
OPERATING MANUAL

GROUND RUN UP - DANGER AREAS


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-08-00010163.0015001 / 06 JAN 16
Applicable to: V2500

PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 11/12
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - ENGINE START
OPERATING MANUAL

GROUND RUN UP - DANGER AREAS


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-08-00010163.0017001 / 12 MAY 16
Applicable to: LEAP1A

PRO-NOR-SOP-08 P 12/12
←B 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER START
OPERATING MANUAL

AFTER START

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010210.0002001 / 21 MAR 17


Applicable to: CFM

ENG MODE
ENG MODE selector .............................................................................................................. NORM
For additional information on the automatic starting sequence, Refer to DSC-70-80-40 Sequence
of the Automatic Start.
After start, to avoid thermal shock, the pilot should operate the engine at idle or near idle for at
least 2 min before advancing the thrust lever to high power. Taxi time at idle may be included in
the warm-up period.
The last engine started must run for at least 2 min before takeoff initiation, to ensure that takeoff
is not initiated before the center tank pumps test is finished, since takeoff on center tank is
prohibited.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010210.0003001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: V2500

ENG MODE
ENG MODE selector .............................................................................................................. NORM
For additional information on the automatic starting sequence, Refer to DSC-70-80-40 Sequence
of the Automatic Start.
After a shutdown period greater than 2 h, to avoid thermal shock, the pilot should operate the
engine at idle or near idle for at least 5 min before advancing the thrust lever to high power. Taxi
time at idle may be included in the warm-up period.
The last engine started must run for at least 2 min before takeoff initiation, to ensure that takeoff
is not initiated before the center tank pumps test is finished, since takeoff on center tank is
prohibited.

PRO-NOR-SOP-09 P 1/8
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER START
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010210.0007001 / 21 MAR 17


Applicable to: LEAP1A

ENG MODE
ENG MODE selector .............................................................................................................. NORM
For additional information on the automatic starting sequence, Refer to DSC-70-80-40 Sequence
of the Automatic Start.
After start, to avoid thermal shock, the pilot should operate the engine at idle or near idle for at
least 3 min before advancing the thrust lever to high power. Taxi time at idle may be included in
the warm-up period.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010211.0001001 / 26 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL

APU BLEED
APU BLEED pb-sw......................................................................................................................OFF
‐ This action enables to avoid ingestion of engine exhaust gases.
‐ APU BLEED valve closes, ENG BLEED valves open.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010212.0004001 / 05 MAR 19
Applicable to: V2500

ANTI-ICE
CAUTION In icing conditions (Refer to LIM-ICE_RAIN Definition of Icing Conditions), the
flight crew must turn on the engine anti-ice and should not wait until seeing ice
building up.

PRO-NOR-SOP-09 P 2/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER START
OPERATING MANUAL

ENG ANTI-ICE pb-sw ....................................................................................................... AS RQRD


‐ Turn on engine anti-ice during all ground operations, when icing conditions exist or are
anticipated.
‐ During ground operation, when in icing conditions and the OAT is +3 °C or less, or if significant
engine vibration occurs, the following procedure should be applied for ice shedding :
L2 Note: 1. The flight crew must consider the taxi-in time from the previous flight and the
taxi-out time of the current flight to determine the total taxi time.
2. If a maintenance task to de-ice the engines was performed before engine start, the
taxi-in time of the previous flight must be disregarded.
3. For taxi-in time, Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-22 Parking - Icing Conditions.
L1 CAUTION If, during thrust increase, the aircraft starts to move, immediately retard the
thrust levers to IDLE.
If ground surface conditions and the environment permit, the flight crew should accelerate the
engines to minimum 50 % of N1 at intervals not greater than 15 min. There is no requirement to
maintain the high trust settings.
In addition, this engine acceleration should also be performed just before take-off, with particular
attention to engine parameters to ensure normal engine operation.
Note: When performing the static run–up, the 61-74 % N1 range should be avoided.
‐ If ENG ANTI ICE pb-sw is set to ON and the valve(s) do not open (FAULT light(s) remain on),
increase the N2 of the associated engine by about 5 %.
When the valves are open, retard the thrust lever(s) to idle.
‐ If ENG ANTI ICE pb-sw is set to ON, the IGNITION memo appears on the ECAM because
continuous ignition is automatically selected.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010212.0005001 / 05 MAR 19
Applicable to: CFM

ANTI-ICE
CAUTION In icing conditions (Refer to LIM-ICE_RAIN Definition of Icing Conditions), the
flight crew must turn on the engine anti-ice and should not wait until seeing ice
building up.

PRO-NOR-SOP-09 P 3/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER START
OPERATING MANUAL

ENG ANTI-ICE pb-sw ....................................................................................................... AS RQRD


‐ Turn on engine anti-ice during all ground operation, when icing conditions exist or are
anticipated.
‐ During ground operation, when in icing conditions and the OAT is +3 °C or less for more than
30 min, the following procedure should be applied for ice shedding:
L2 Note: 1. The flight crew must consider the taxi-in time from the previous flight and the
taxi-out time of the current flight to determine the total taxi time.
2. If a maintenance task to de-ice the engines was performed before engine start, the
taxi-in time of the previous flight must be disregarded.
3. For taxi-in time, Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-22 Parking - Icing Conditions.
L1 CAUTION If, during thrust increase, the aircraft starts to move, immediately retard the
thrust levers to IDLE.
If ground surface conditions and the environment permit, the flight crew should accelerate the
engines to approximately 70 % of N1 for 30 s at intervals not greater than 30 min.
In addition, this engine acceleration should also be performed just before take-off, with particular
attention to engine parameters to ensure normal engine operation. If ground surface or
environment do not permit to accelerate the engine to 70 % N1, then power setting and dwell
time should be as high as practical.
When operating in conditions of freezing rain, freezing drizzle, freezing fog or heavy snow, ice
shedding may be enhanced, by additional run ups at intervals, to not exceed 10 min, advancing
throttles to 70 % N1 momentarily (no hold time).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010212.0008001 / 05 MAR 19
Applicable to: LEAP1A

ANTI-ICE
CAUTION In icing conditions (Refer to LIM-ICE_RAIN Definition of Icing Conditions), the
flight crew must turn on the engine anti-ice and should not wait until seeing ice
building up.

PRO-NOR-SOP-09 P 4/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER START
OPERATING MANUAL

ENG ANTI-ICE pb-sw ....................................................................................................... AS RQRD


‐ Turn on engine anti-ice during all ground operations when, icing conditions exist or are
anticipated.
‐ During ground operation, when in icing conditions and the OAT is +3 °C or less, or if significant
engine vibration occurs, the following procedure should be applied for ice shedding:
L2 Note: 1. The flight crew must consider the taxi-in time from the previous flight and the
taxi-out time of the current flight to determine the total taxi time.
2. If a maintenance task to de-ice the engines was performed before engine start, the
taxi-in time of the previous flight must be disregarded.
3. For taxi-in time, Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-22 Parking - Icing Conditions.
L1 CAUTION If, during thrust increase, the aircraft starts to move, immediately retard the
thrust levers to IDLE.
If ground surface conditions and the environment permit, the flight crew should accelerate the
engines to approximately 50 % of N1 for 5 s at intervals not greater than 60 min.
In addition, this engine acceleration should also be performed just before takeoff, with particular
attention to engine parameters to ensure normal engine operation. If ground surface or
environment do not permit to accelerate the engine to 50 % N1, then power setting and dwell
time should be as high as practical.
If takeoff is not initiated within 120 min in ground icing conditions, the flight crew must request
the maintenance personnel to perform an engine inspection in accordance with the applicable
maintenance procedure.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010213.0001001 / 04 NOV 20
Applicable to: ALL

WING ANTI-ICE pb-sw.......................................................................................................... AS RQRD


On ground when wing anti-ice is switched on, the anti-ice valves open for about 30 s for self-test
sequence, then close as long as the aircraft is on ground.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010214.0001001 / 04 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

APU
 If the APU is not required:
APU MASTER SW................................................................................................................OFF
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010215.0001001 / 26 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL

GROUND SPOILERS
GROUND SPOILERS................................................................................................................. ARM

PRO-NOR-SOP-09 P 5/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER START
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010216.0001001 / 26 OCT 12


Applicable to: ALL

RUDDER TRIM
RUD TRIM position indication.....................................................................................CHECK ZERO
 If the RUD TRIM position indication is not at zero:
RESET pb........................................................................................................................ PRESS
Note: After the reset, the flight crew may observe an indication of up to 0.3 ° (L or R) in the
RUD TRIM position indication.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010217.0001001 / 26 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL

FLAPS
FLAPS lever...................................................................................................... SET FOR TAKEOFF
FLAPS.................................................................................................................. CHECK POSITION
Check the position of the flaps on the ECAM upper display.
 If taxiing in icing conditions with rain, slush or snow:
Maintain the flaps retracted until the aircraft reaches the holding point of the takeoff runway.
This action prevents contamination of the slats/flaps mechanism.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010218.0001001 / 26 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL

PITCH TRIM
PITCH TRIM handwheel..............................................................................................................SET
Set takeoff CG on pitch trim handwheel.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010220.0001001 / 01 DEC 14
Applicable to: ALL

ECAM STATUS
STATUS REMINDER............................................................................... CHECK NOT DISPLAYED
 If STS reminder is displayed:
STS pb............................................................................................................................. PRESS
Review the ECAM Status page.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00015495.0001001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: ALL

N/W STEER DISC MEMO


N/W STEER DISC MEMO....................................................................... CHECK NOT DISPLAYED

PRO-NOR-SOP-09 P 6/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER START
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010221.0001001 / 05 NOV 15


Applicable to: ALL

GROUND CREW
CLEAR TO DISCONNECT.............................................................................................ANNOUNCE
The ground crew:
‐ Removes the chocks
‐ Disconnects the interphone
‐ Makes the hand signal on the left or right side.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00010222.0001001 / 26 OCT 12
Applicable to: ALL

AFTER START CHECKLIST


AFTER START CHECKLIST.......................................................................................... COMPLETE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-09-A-00020074.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

AFTER START - FLOW PATTERN


When the engines have started, the PF sets the ENG MODE selector to NORM to permit normal
pack operation. At this time, the After Start Flow Pattern begins.

PRO-NOR-SOP-09 P 7/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER START
OPERATING MANUAL

PRO-NOR-SOP-09 P 8/8
←A 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
OPERATING MANUAL

TAXI
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010226.0001001 / 15 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

TAXI CLEARANCE
TAXI clearance...................................................................................................................... OBTAIN
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010227.0001001 / 17 JAN 18
Applicable to: ALL

EXTERIOR LIGHTS
NOSE sw.....................................................................................................................................TAXI
 When crossing a runway:
STROBE sw............................................................................................................................ ON
RWY TURN OFF sw..................................................................................................................... ON
L2 The PF may ask the PM to set the exterior lights.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010228.0001001 / 15 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

PARK BRK
PARK BRK handle.......................................................................................................................OFF
BRAKES PRESSURE........................................................................................... CHECK AT ZERO
The flight crew may observe slight residual pressure on the triple indicator for a short period of
time.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010230.0001001 / 19 APR 17
Applicable to: ALL

THRUST LEVER
THRUST lever ...................................................................................................................AS RQRD
The flight crew will need a little power above idle thrust to move the aircraft.
L2
For additional information on the thrust use during taxi, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-100 Taxi Roll
and Steering.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010231.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: OLD

BRAKES
CAUTION If the aircraft was parked in wet conditions for a long time, the first brake
application at low speed is less effective.

PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 1/8
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
OPERATING MANUAL

BRAKE PEDALS.....................................................................................................................PRESS
BRAKES ................................................................................................................................ CHECK
If an arc is displayed above the brake temperature on the WHEEL SD page, set the brake fans 
to ON.
BRAKES PRESSURE........................................................................................... CHECK AT ZERO
L2 For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-100 Brake Check.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010231.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: NEW

BRAKES
CAUTION If the aircraft was parked in wet conditions for a long time, the first brake
application at low speed is less effective.
BRAKE PEDALS.....................................................................................................................PRESS
BRAKES ................................................................................................................................ CHECK
If an arc is displayed above the brake temperature on the WHEEL SD page, set the brake fans 
to ON.
L2 For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-100 Brake Check.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00016023.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

NOSEWHEEL STEERING
TILLER or RUDDER PEDALS.................................................................................. USE AS RQRD
L2 For information on the nosewheel steering limitation, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-100 Taxi Roll
and Steering.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010243.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

FLIGHT CONTROLS
FLIGHT CONTROLS..............................................................................................................CHECK
L2 For additional information on the flight controls check, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-100 Flight
Controls.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010244.0001001 / 15 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

ATC CLEARANCE
ATC clearance....................................................................................................................CONFIRM

PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 2/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010248.0001001 / 05 DEC 17


Applicable to: ALL

TAKEOFF DATA/CONDITIONS
 If takeoff conditions changed:
For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-TAXI-Last Data Changes Before Takeoff
FINAL TAKEOFF PERF DATA............................................................................. RECOMPUTE
The PF and the PM independently compute again the takeoff performance data.
FMS TAKEOFF DATA.................................................................................................... REVISE
The PM revises the takeoff data in the FMS.
If the flight crew uses the optimum configuration option for the computation, they should pay
specific attention to changes to the configuration of the slats/flaps at takeoff.
FMS REVISED TAKEOFF PERF DATA.............................................................CROSSCHECK
The PF crosschecks the performance data displayed on the PF's EFB with the FMS PERF
T.O page.
EFB/MCDU GREEN DOT.......................................................................................... COMPARE
The PF compares Green Dot speed computed by the FMGS and the Green Dot speed
computed using the TAKEOFF application. A discrepancy indicates a difference in the TOW
used in both systems (EFB/FMGS).
FLAPS lever ................................................................................................ AS APPROPRIATE
Select takeoff position.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00015301.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

AFS/FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
F-PLN (SID,TRANS)............................................................................................REVISE or CHECK
Carefully confirm that the ATC clearance agrees with the FMS, if NAV mode is to be used.
INITIAL CLIMB SPEED AND SPEED LIMIT...................................................... MODIFY or CHECK
Use VERT REV at departure, or at a CLB waypoint.
CLEARED ALTITUDE ON FCU ................................................................................................. SET
HDG ON FCU ............................................................................................IF REQUIRED, PRESET
If a heading is required by the ATC after takeoff, in case of a radar vector departure, preset the
heading on the FCU. NAV mode will be disarmed.
RWY TRK mode will keep the aircraft on the runway track.
BOTH FD ........................................................................................................................CHECK ON
PFD/ND ................................................................................................................................. CHECK

PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 3/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
OPERATING MANUAL

TAKEOFF BRIEFING.........................................................................................................CONFIRM
L2 For additional information on the takeoff briefing confirmation, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-100
Takeoff Briefing Confirmation.
Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00015299.0001001 / 03 AUG 17
Applicable to: 1
Impacted DU: 00015298 Taxi - Radar

RADAR.............................................................................................................................................. ON
To check the radar and the departure path, set the MULTISCAN sw to MAN. The flight crew can then
set the radar to the AUTO position.
Gain must be manually set to +8, when MULTISCAN sw is set to AUTO and when flying below
FL 150.
Note: 1. MULTISCAN AUTO mode provides an efficient ground clutter rejection. During operation
in good or non significant weather conditions, no weather pattern will be displayed on
the ND’s. In this case, the flight crew confirms correct radar operation, using temporarily
MANUAL TILT.
2. The flight crew monitors the weather radar display in AUTO mode, and confirms any
weather display that is ambiguous or unexpected using manual tilt according to standard
techniques.
PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM  ..................................................................................AUTO
Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00015299.0002001 / 03 AUG 17
Applicable to: 2
Impacted DU: 00015298 Taxi - Radar

RADAR.............................................................................................................................................. ON
To check the radar and the departure path, set the MULTISCAN sw to MAN. The flight crew can then
set the radar to the AUTO position.
Gain must be manually set to +4, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below
FL 200.

PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 4/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
OPERATING MANUAL

Note: 1. If the weather is good, or not significant, in order to check that the radar is operating
correctly: down tilt until displaying ground echoes
2. If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather
situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique.
3. In particular below FL 200, for situations with low-level weather, weather with low
reflectivity or in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to Manual
mode and adjust the tilt setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground
clutter appears on the upper part of the display.
4. In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower
reflectivity targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and Manual
modes to display lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be
displayed as a result of low settings and/or increased gain.
PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM  ..................................................................................AUTO
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00015298.0001001 / 03 AUG 17
Applicable to: 3

RADAR.............................................................................................................................................. ON
PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM  ..................................................................................AUTO

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00015298.0002001 / 03 AUG 17


Applicable to: 4

RADAR.............................................................................................................................................. ON
To check the radar and the departure path, set the MULTISCAN sw to MAN. The flight crew can then
set the radar to the AUTO position.
PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM  ..................................................................................AUTO
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00015298.0003001 / 03 AUG 17
Applicable to: 5

RADAR.............................................................................................................................................. ON
To check the radar and the departure path, set the TILT sw to MAN. The flight crew can then set the
radar to the AUTO position.

PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 5/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
OPERATING MANUAL

PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM  ..................................................................................AUTO


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00015298.0005001 / 03 AUG 17
Applicable to: NEO

WXR/PWS (1 or 2  )....................................................................................................................ON
RADAR CAPT DISPLAY mode sel..................................................................................................ALL
RADAR F/O DISPLAY mode sel..................................................................................................... ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010252.0001001 / 20 JAN 15
Applicable to: ALL

ATC
ATC code/mode...............................................................................CONFIRM/SET FOR TAKEOFF
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010254.0001001 / 03 AUG 17
Applicable to: ALL

TERR ON ND
TERR ON ND  .............................................................................................................AS RQRD
Consider selecting the radar display on the PF side, and TERR ON ND on the PM side only.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010264.0001001 / 15 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

AUTO BRK
AUTO BRK MAX pb-sw................................................................................................................ ON
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010268.0001001 / 04 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

FINAL CHECK
T.O CONFIG pb.........................................................................................................................TEST
Check that ECAM upper display shows “T.O CONFIG NORMAL”.
T.O MEMO............................................................................................................ CHECK NO BLUE
CABIN REPORT................................................................................................................. RECEIVE
Obtain cabin report from the purser, as a minimum : “CABIN SECURED FOR TAKEOFF”
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00010271.0001001 / 15 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

BEFORE TAKEOFF CHECKLIST


BEFORE TAKEOFF CHECKLIST down to the line........................................................COMPLETE

PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 6/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-10-A-00020075.0001001 / 17 MAR 17


Applicable to: ALL

TAXI FLOW PATTERN

PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 7/8
←A 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAXI
OPERATING MANUAL

Intentionally left blank

PRO-NOR-SOP-10 P 8/8
18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - BEFORE TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

BEFORE TAKEOFF
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00010396.0001001 / 05 MAR 18
Applicable to: ALL

BRAKE FANS 
 If the brake fans  are running:
BRAKE TEMP..................................................................................................................CHECK
‐ If brake temperature is above 150 °C, delay takeoff.
‐ If brake temperature is below 150 °C, select brake fans off.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00010388.0001001 / 05 MAR 18
Applicable to: ALL

LINE-UP CLEARANCE
LINE-UP CLEARANCE..........................................................................................................OBTAIN
Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00014740.0001001 / 05 MAR 18
Applicable to: SHARKLETS
Impacted DU: 00010392 Before Takeoff - Exterior Lights

EXTERIOR LIGHTS
STROBE sw...................................................................................................................................ON
Set the STROBE sw to ON when entering the runway.
Note: The flight crew can switch off the strobe lights if the lights cause any visual trouble during
the flight.

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00010392.0002001 / 05 MAR 18


Applicable to: OVER

EXTERIOR LIGHTS
STROBE sw...................................................................................................................................ON
Set the STROBE sw to ON when entering the runway.

PRO-NOR-SOP-11 P 1/4
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - BEFORE TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00010389.0001001 / 04 MAR 14


Applicable to: ALL

TCAS
TCAS  Mode selector..............................................................................................TA or TA/RA
L2 The flight crew should use the TA/RA mode as the default mode of the TCAS.
The flight crew may use the TA ONLY mode in specific airports, and for specific procedures
(identified by Operators) that may provide resolution advisories that are neither wanted nor
appropriate (e.g. closely-spaced parallel or converging runways).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00010390.0001001 / 04 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

APPROACH PATH CLEARED OF TRAFFIC


APPROACH PATH......................................................................................CLEARED OF TRAFFIC
Check that the approach path is clear of traffic, visually and using TCAS display on ND.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00010399.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: ALL

CABIN CREW............................................................................................................................ADVISE
Advise the cabin crew that takeoff is imminent.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00010397.0002001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: V2500

ENG MODE selector..............................................................................................................AS RQRD


Select IGN START, if heavy rain or severe turbulence is expected after takeoff.
Note: Continuous ignition is automatically selected, if the ENG 1 ANTI ICE pb and ENG 2 ANTI
ICE pb are ON.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00010397.0004001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: CFM

ENG MODE selector..............................................................................................................AS RQRD


Select IGN, if:
‐ The runway has standing water, or
‐ Heavy rain is falling, or
‐ Heavy rain or severe turbulence is expected after takeoff.

PRO-NOR-SOP-11 P 2/4
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - BEFORE TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

GPS PRIMARY on PROG page........................................................................CHECK AVAILABLE


FMA....................................................................................................................................... CHECK
Verify NAV is armed (blue).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00010394.0001001 / 17 NOV 20
Applicable to: ALL

SLIDING TABLE/EFB
SLIDING TABLE.......................................................................................................................STOW
ALL EFB transmitting mode............................................................................................... AS RQRD
In accordance with the Operator's policy or, as required by operational regulations.
ALL EFB (with no mounted equipment).................................................................................. STOW
In flight, both flight crewmembers should not use at the same time EFB applications.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00010393.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

TAKEOFF RUNWAY..............................................................................................................CONFIRM
Confirm that the line up is performed on the intended runway. Useful aids are:
‐ The runway markings,
‐ The runway lights,
Be careful that in low visibility, edge lights could be mixed up with the center line lights.
‐ The ILS signal,
If the runway is ILS equipped, the flight crew can press the ILS pb (or LS pb): The LOC deviation
should be centered after line up.
‐ The runway symbol on the ND,
‐ The Runway Awareness and Advisory System  .
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00010391.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

PACK 1 and 2........................................................................................................................AS RQRD


Consider selecting packs OFF, or APU bleed ON.
This will improve performance when using TOGA thrust.
In case of a FLEX takeoff, selecting packs OFF or APU bleed ON will reduce takeoff EGT, and thus
reduce maintenance costs.
The use of flex thrust may reduce maintenance costs. The effect is particularly significant with the
first degrees of FLEX.
Use of APU bleed is not authorized, if wing anti-ice is to be used.

PRO-NOR-SOP-11 P 3/4
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - BEFORE TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-11-A-00010400.0001001 / 16 MAR 11


Applicable to: ALL

BEFORE TAKEOFF CHECKLIST below the line............................................................... COMPLETE


Read the checklist below the line, when line-up clearance is obtained.

PRO-NOR-SOP-11 P 4/4
←A 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

TAKEOFF
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00022130.0001001 / 05 MAR 18
Applicable to: ALL

TAKEOFF CLEARANCE
TAKEOFF CLEARANCE....................................................................................................... OBTAIN
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00022129.0001001 / 05 MAR 18
Applicable to: ALL

EXTERIOR LIGHTS
NOSE sw.......................................................................................................................................T.O
RWY TURN OFF sw..................................................................................................................... ON
LAND lights sw.............................................................................................................................. ON
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011560.0032001 / 05 MAR 18
Applicable to: V2500

THRUST SETTING
The below procedure is the standard takeoff procedure. However, rolling takeoff is permitted.
TAKEOFF....................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
THRUST LEVERS........................................................................................... 50 % N1 (1.05 EPR)
 If the crosswind is at or below 20 kt and there is no tailwind:
To counter the nose-up effect of setting engine takeoff thrust, apply half forward sidestick until
the airspeed reaches 80 kt. Release the sidestick gradually to reach neutral at 100 kt.
BRAKES.......................................................................................................................RELEASE
THRUST LEVERS................................................................................................. FLX or TOGA
Once the thrust levers are set to FLX or TOGA detent, the Captain keeps his hand on the
thrust levers until the aircraft reaches V1.
 In case of tailwind, or if crosswind is greater than 20 kt:
The PF applies full forward sidestick.
BRAKES.......................................................................................................................RELEASE
THRUST LEVERS................................................................................................. FLX or TOGA
‐ The PF increases thrust progressively to reach takeoff thrust by 40 kt ground speed, while
maintaining sidestick full forward up to 80 kt. Release the sidestick gradually to reach
neutral at 100 kt.
‐ Once the thrust levers are set to FLX or TOGA detent, the Captain keeps his hand on the
thrust levers until the aircraft reaches V1.

PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 1/10
A→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

Note: 1. ENG SD page replaces WHEEL SD page on the ECAM lower display
2. The FADEC includes a keep-out zone, which is designed to avoid steady state
operation inside a N1 range between 60 % and 74 % due to fan flutter phenomenon.
This can result in discontinuous EPR increase during thrust setting (Refer to
DSC-70-20 Functions).
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL......................................................................................... USE RUDDER
At 130 kt (wheel speed), the connection between nosewheel steering and the rudder pedals
is removed. Therefore, in strong crosswinds, more rudder input will be required at this point to
prevent the aircraft from turning into the wind.
CHRONO.................................................................................................................................START
PFD/ND .............................................................................................................................MONITOR
1. Check the FMA on the PFD. The following modes are displayed: MAN TOGA (or MAN FLX xx)
/SRS/RWY (or blank) / A/THR (in blue).
Note: If an ILS that corresponds to the departure runway is tuned, RWY mode appears. If
not, no lateral mode appears until the aircraft lifts off.
2. Check the FMS position on the ND (aircraft on runway centerline).
Note: If GPS PRIMARY is not available, check the FMS position update.
FMA ............................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011560.0006001 / 05 MAR 18
Applicable to: CFM

THRUST SETTING
The below procedure is the standard takeoff procedure. However, rolling takeoff is permitted.
TAKEOFF....................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
THRUST LEVERS.............................................................................................50 % N1 (1.05 EPR)
 If the crosswind is at or below 20 kt and there is no tailwind:
To counter the nose-up effect of setting engine takeoff thrust, apply half forward sidestick until
the airspeed reaches 80 kt. Release the sidestick gradually to reach neutral at 100 kt.
BRAKES.......................................................................................................................RELEASE
THRUST LEVERS................................................................................................. FLX or TOGA
Once the thrust levers are set to FLX or TOGA detent, the Captain keeps his hand on the
thrust levers until the aircraft reaches V1.
 In case of tailwind, or if crosswind is greater than 20 kt:
The PF applies full forward sidestick.

PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 2/10
←A→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

BRAKES.......................................................................................................................RELEASE
THRUST LEVERS................................................................................................. FLX or TOGA
‐ The PF rapidly increases thrust to about 70 % N1 (1.15 EPR) then progressively to reach
takeoff thrust by 40 kt ground speed, while maintaining sidestick full forward up to 80 kt.
Release the sidestick gradually to reach neutral at 100 kt.
‐ Once the thrust levers are set to FLX or TOGA detent, the Captain keeps his hand on the
thrust levers until the aircraft reaches V1.
Note: ENG SD page replaces WHEEL SD page on the ECAM lower display.
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL......................................................................................... USE RUDDER
At 130 kt (wheel speed), the connection between nosewheel steering and the rudder pedals
is removed. Therefore, in strong crosswinds, more rudder input will be required at this point to
prevent the aircraft from turning into the wind.
CHRONO.................................................................................................................................START
PFD/ND.............................................................................................................................. MONITOR
1. Check the FMA on the PFD. The following modes are displayed: MAN TOGA (or MAN FLX xx)
/SRS/RWY (or blank) / A/THR (in blue).
Note: If an ILS that corresponds to the departure runway is tuned, RWY mode appears. If
not, no lateral mode appears until the aircraft lifts off.
2. Check the FMS position on the ND (aircraft on runway centerline).
Note: If GPS PRIMARY is not available, check the FMS position update.
FMA................................................................................................................................ ANNOUNCE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011560.0034001 / 05 MAR 18
Applicable to: LEAP1A

THRUST SETTING
The below procedure is the standard takeoff procedure. However, rolling takeoff is permitted.
TAKEOFF....................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
THRUST LEVERS................................................................................................................50 % N1
 If the crosswind is at or below 20 kt and there is no tailwind:
To counter the nose-up effect of setting engine takeoff thrust, apply half forward sidestick until
the airspeed reaches 80 kt. Release the sidestick gradually to reach neutral at 100 kt.
BRAKES.......................................................................................................................RELEASE
THRUST LEVERS................................................................................................. FLX or TOGA
Once the thrust levers are set to FLX or TOGA detent, the Captain keeps his hand on the
thrust levers until the aircraft reaches V1.

PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 3/10
←A→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

 In case of tailwind, or if crosswind is greater than 20 kt:


The PF applies full forward sidestick.
BRAKES.......................................................................................................................RELEASE
THRUST LEVERS................................................................................................. FLX or TOGA
‐ The PF rapidly increases thrust to about 70 % N1 then, above 15 kt ground speed,
progressively increases thrust to reach takeoff thrust by 40 kt ground speed, while
maintaining sidestick full forward up to 80 kt. Release the sidestick gradually to reach
neutral at 100 kt.
‐ Once the thrust levers are set to FLX or TOGA detent, the Captain keeps his hand on the
thrust levers until the aircraft reaches V1.
Note: ENG SD page replaces WHEEL SD page on the ECAM lower display.
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL......................................................................................... USE RUDDER
At 130 kt (wheel speed), the connection between nosewheel steering and the rudder pedals
is removed. Therefore, in strong crosswinds, more rudder input will be required at this point to
prevent the aircraft from turning into the wind.
CHRONO.................................................................................................................................START
PFD/ND.............................................................................................................................. MONITOR
1. Check the FMA on the PFD. The following modes are displayed: MAN TOGA (or MAN FLX xx)
/SRS/RWY (or blank) / A/THR (in blue).
Note: If an ILS that corresponds to the departure runway is tuned, RWY mode appears. If
not, no lateral mode appears until the aircraft lifts off.
2. Check the FMS position on the ND (aircraft on runway centerline).
Note: If GPS PRIMARY is not available, check the FMS position update.
FMA................................................................................................................................ ANNOUNCE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011561.0001001 / 04 MAR 14
Applicable to: CFM LEAP1A

BELOW 80 KT
TAKEOFF N1......................................................................................................................... CHECK
Check that the actual N1 of the individual engines has reached the N1 rating limit, before the
aircraft reaches 80 kt. Check EGT.
THRUST SET................................................................................................................. ANNOUNCE
PFD and ENG indications..................................................................................................MONITOR
Scan airspeed, N1, and EGT throughout the takeoff.

PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 4/10
←A→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011561.0002001 / 04 MAR 14


Applicable to: V2500

BELOW 80 KT
TAKEOFF EPR.......................................................................................................................CHECK
Check that the actual EPR of the individual engines has reached the EPR rating limit, before the
aircraft reaches 80 kt. Check EGT.
THRUST SET................................................................................................................. ANNOUNCE
PFD and ENG indications..................................................................................................MONITOR
Scan airspeed, EPR, and EGT throughout the takeoff.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011562.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

REACHING 100 KT
ONE HUNDRED KNOTS............................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
‐ The PF crosschecks and confirms the speed indicated on the PFD
‐ Below 100 kt the Captain may decide to abort the takeoff, depending on the circumstances
‐ Above 100 kt, rejecting the takeoff is a more serious matter.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011563.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

AT V1
V1....................................................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011564.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

AT VR
ROTATION ............................................................................................................................ORDER
ROTATION........................................................................................................................ PERFORM
‐ At VR, initiate the rotation to achieve a continuous rotation with a rate of about 3 °/s, towards a
pitch attitude 15 ° (12.5 °, one engine is failed)
‐ Minimize the lateral inputs on ground and during the rotation, to avoid spoiler extension
‐ In strong crosswind conditions, small lateral stick inputs may be used, if necessary, to aim at
maintaining wings level
‐ After lift-off, follow the SRS pitch command bar.
CAUTION If a tailstrike occurs, avoid flying at an altitude requiring a pressurized cabin, and
return to the originating airport for damage assessment.

PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 5/10
←A→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011565.0001001 / 04 MAR 14


Applicable to: ALL

WHEN POSITIVE CLIMB


POSITIVE CLIMB........................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
L/G UP................................................................................................................................... ORDER
L/G.................................................................................................................................. SELECT UP
AP.......................................................................................................................................AS RQRD
Above 100 ft AGL, AP 1 or 2 may be engaged.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011566.0002001 / 28 JUL 15
Applicable to: ALL

AT THRUST REDUCTION ALTITUDE


THRUST LEVERS..........................................................................................................................CL
Move the thrust levers to the CL detent, when the flashing LVR CLB prompt appears on the FMA.
A/THR is now active.
In manual flight, the pilot must anticipate the change in pitch attitude in order to prevent the speed
from decaying when thrust is reduced.
PACK 1 and 2 (if applicable)........................................................................................................ ON
Select PACK 1 on after CLB thrust reduction.
Select PACK 2, at least 10 s after PACK 1 is selected on, for passenger comfort.
Note: 1. Selecting pack on before reducing takeoff thrust would result in an EGT increase.
2. If packs are not switched on after the takeoff phase, an ECAM caution will be
triggered.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011567.0002001 / 04 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

AT ACCELERATION ALTITUDE
Check the target speed change from V2 + 10 to the first CLB speed (either preselected or
managed).
Note: 1. When THR RED and ACC ALT are equal, the FMA will change from MAN
FLX/SRS/NAV to THR CLB/CLB/NAV.
2. If FCU-selected altitude is equal to or close to the acceleration altitude, then the FMA
will switch from SRS to ALT*.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011568.0001001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: A319/20 CEO

ABOVE ACCELERATION ALTITUDE (OR ONCE IN CLIMB PHASE)


The following procedure ensures that the aircraft is effectively accelerating toward climb speed.

PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 6/10
←A→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

 At F speed:
Note: For takeoff in CONF 1 + F, “F” speed does not appear.
FLAPS 1.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 1......................................................................................................................... SELECT
 At S speed:
FLAPS 0.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 0......................................................................................................................... SELECT
GND SPLRS...................................................................................................................DISARM
NOSE sw...............................................................................................................................OFF
RWY TURN OFF sw.............................................................................................................OFF
OTHER EXTERIOR LIGHTS.......................................................................................AS RQRD
The flight crew can maintain the LAND LIGHTS selector set to ON, according to airline policy
or regulatory recommendations.
Note: The CRUISE SD page replaces the ENG SD page.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011568.0005001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: A321 CEO

ABOVE ACCELERATION ALTITUDE (OR ONCE IN CLIMB PHASE)


The following procedure ensures that the aircraft is effectively accelerating toward climb speed.
 At F speed:
Note: For takeoff in CONF 1 + F, “F” speed does not appear.
FLAPS 1.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 1......................................................................................................................... SELECT
 At S speed:
Note: At heavy takeoff weight, the S speed on A321 may be higher than the MAX speed
of configuration 1 + F (215 kt). Continue to accelerate and on reaching 210 kt the
automatic flap retraction will occur and the MAX speed will move to 230 kt.
FLAPS 0.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 0......................................................................................................................... SELECT
GND SPLRS...................................................................................................................DISARM
NOSE sw...............................................................................................................................OFF
RWY TURN OFF sw.............................................................................................................OFF
OTHER EXTERIOR LIGHTS.......................................................................................AS RQRD
The flight crew can maintain the LAND LIGHTS selector set to ON, according to airline policy
or regulatory recommendations.

PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 7/10
←A→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

Note: The CRUISE SD page replaces the ENG SD page.


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011568.0032001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: A321 CEO GW>100T

ABOVE ACCELERATION ALTITUDE (OR ONCE IN CLIMB PHASE)


The following procedure ensures that the aircraft is effectively accelerating toward climb speed.
 At F speed:
Note: For takeoff in CONF 1 + F, “F” speed does not appear.
FLAPS 1.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 1......................................................................................................................... SELECT
 At S speed:
Note: At heavy takeoff weight, the S speed on A321 may be higher than the MAX speed
of configuration 1 + F (225 kt). Continue to accelerate and on reaching 210 kt the
automatic flap retraction will occur and the MAX speed will move to 235 kt.
FLAPS 0.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 0......................................................................................................................... SELECT
GND SPLRS...................................................................................................................DISARM
NOSE sw...............................................................................................................................OFF
RWY TURN OFF sw.............................................................................................................OFF
OTHER EXTERIOR LIGHTS.......................................................................................AS RQRD
The flight crew can maintain the LAND LIGHTS selector set to ON, according to airline policy
or regulatory recommendations.
Note: The CRUISE SD page replaces the ENG SD page.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011568.0034001 / 04 JUN 19
Applicable to: NEO

ABOVE ACCELERATION ALTITUDE (OR ONCE IN CLIMB PHASE)


The following procedure ensures that the aircraft is effectively accelerating toward climb speed.
 At F speed:
Note: For takeoff in CONF 1 + F, “F” speed does not appear.
FLAPS 1.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 1......................................................................................................................... SELECT

PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 8/10
←A→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

 At S speed:
Note: At heavy takeoff weight, the S speed on A321 may be higher than the MAX speed
of configuration 1 + F (225 kt). Continue to accelerate and on reaching 210 kt the
automatic flap retraction will occur and the MAX speed will move to 243 kt.
FLAPS 0.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 0......................................................................................................................... SELECT
GND SPLRS...................................................................................................................DISARM
NOSE sw...............................................................................................................................OFF
RWY TURN OFF sw.............................................................................................................OFF
OTHER EXTERIOR LIGHTS.......................................................................................AS RQRD
The flight crew can maintain the LAND LIGHTS selector set to ON, according to airline policy
or regulatory recommendations.
Note: The CRUISE SD page replaces the ENG SD page.

PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 9/10
←A→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-12-A-00011570.0001001 / 18 DEC 12


Applicable to: ALL

PRO-NOR-SOP-12 P 10/10
←A 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

AFTER TAKEOFF
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-13-A-00010157.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

APU BLEED pb .................................................................................................................... AS RQRD


If the APU has been used to supply air conditioning during takeoff, set the APU BLEED pb to OFF.
For use of the APU BLEED, Refer to LIM-APU Operational Envelope.
APU MASTER SW pb .......................................................................................................... AS RQRD
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-13-A-00010158.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: CEO

ENG MODE selector..............................................................................................................AS RQRD


Select IGN, if severe turbulence or heavy rain is encountered.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-13-A-00010159.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

TCAS  Mode selector ...........................................................................................................TA/RA


Select TA/RA, if the takeoff has been performed with TA only.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-13-A-00010160.0001001 / 12 SEP 17
Applicable to: V2500

ENG ANTI-ICE pb-sw ........................................................................................................... AS RQRD


Engine anti-ice must be set to ON when icing conditions (Refer to LIM-ICE_RAIN Definition of Icing
Conditions) exist or are anticipated, except during climb and cruise when the SAT is below -40 °C
(-40 °F).
Note: With ENG ANTI ICE ON, the FADEC automatically selects continuous ignition. The
IGNITION memo appears on ECAM.
WING ANTI-ICE pb-sw ......................................................................................................... AS RQRD
When icing conditions are encountered:
‐ The flight crew may turn on the wing anti-ice to prevent ice accretion on the wing leading edge.
‐ The flight crew must turn on the wing anti-ice if there is evidence of ice accretion, such as ice on
the visual indicator, or on the wipers, or with the SEVERE ICE DETECTED  alert. This is to
remove any ice accumulation from the wing leading edge.

PRO-NOR-SOP-13 P 1/2
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER TAKEOFF
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-13-A-00010160.0002001 / 12 SEP 17


Applicable to: CFM LEAP1A

ENG ANTI-ICE pb-sw ........................................................................................................... AS RQRD


Engine anti-ice must be set to ON when icing conditions (Refer to LIM-ICE_RAIN Definition of Icing
Conditions) exist or are anticipated, except during climb and cruise when the SAT is below -40 °C
(-40 °F).
WING ANTI-ICE pb-sw ......................................................................................................... AS RQRD
When icing conditions are encountered:
‐ The flight crew may turn on the wing anti-ice to prevent ice accretion on the wing leading edge.
‐ The flight crew must turn on the wing anti-ice if there is evidence of ice accretion, such as ice on
the visual indicator, or on the wipers, or with the SEVERE ICE DETECTED  alert. This is to
remove any ice accumulation from the wing leading edge.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-13-A-00010161.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB CHECKLIST down to the line................................................... COMPLETE

PRO-NOR-SOP-13 P 2/2
←A 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
OPERATING MANUAL

CLIMB

PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 1/8
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-14-A-00010245.0002001 / 05 DEC 17


Applicable to: A321 CEO

Normal vertical mode is CLB or OP CLB with managed speed active.


PF MCDU..............................................................................................................................PERF CLB
‐ PF MCDU should be showing the PERF CLB page (allowing PF to monitor when the aircraft will
reach the FCU selected altitude) but he may select other pages such as F-PLN page as may be
tactically necessary.
‐ The MCDU PROG page displays OPT FL and MAX REC FL. It is worth noting that this OPT FL is
a function of the cost index (CI).
‐ The displayed MAX REC FL gives the aircraft at least a 0.3 g buffet margin. The pilot may enter a
cruise flight level above this level into the MCDU and the FMGS will accept it, provided that it does
not exceed the level at which the margin is reduced to 0.2 g.
PM MCDU.................................................................................................................................... F-PLN
PM MCDU should be showing the F-PLN page (allowing him to enter any ATC long-term revisions to
the lateral or vertical flight plan).

PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 2/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
OPERATING MANUAL

CLIMB SPEED MODIFICATIONS


 If ATC, turbulence or operational considerations lead to a speed change:
Select the new speed with FCU SPD knob and pull.
Speed target is now “selected”.
To return to managed speed mode, push FCU SPD knob.
The speed target is now “managed”.
Note: The best speed (and rate of climb) for long-term situations lies between green dot
speed and ECON speed. At high altitude, acceleration from green dot to ECON
speed can take a long time.
EXPEDITE CLIMB 
 If ATC requires a rapid climb through a particular level:
Push the EXP pb on the FCU.
The target speed is now green dot speed. FMA :THR CLB /EXP CLB/NAV
Note: Use EXP  only for short-term tactical situations. For the best overall economy fly
at ECON IAS.
To return to ECON CLB speed:
Push ALT knob.
Check FMA: THR CLB/CLB/NAV

BAROMETRIC REFERENCE................................................................... SET STD/CROSSCHECK


At transition altitude (baro setting flashing on PFD) set STD on the EFIS control panel and standby
altimeter.
Cross-check baro settings and altitude readings.
CRZ FL...................................................................................................................... SET AS RQRD
‐ If ATC clears the aircraft to its intended CRZ FL or above, there is no need to modify the CRZ
FL entered in the INIT A page during cockpit preparation. The MCDU will automatically take into
account a higher CRZ FL selected with the FCU ALT knob.
‐ If ATC limits CRZ FL to a lower level than the one entered in the INIT A page (or present on the
PROG page) the flight crew must insert this lower CRZ FL in the PROG page.
Otherwise there is no transition into CRZ phase : the managed speed targets and Mach are not
modified, and SOFT ALT mode is not available. In that case FMA will display: MACH/ALT/NAV
instead of MACH/ALT CRZ/NAV.

PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 3/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SOP-14-A-00013057.0006001 / 05 DEC 17


Applicable to: A319/20 CEO + NEO
Impacted DU: 00010245 Climb - Initial Climb

Normal vertical mode is CLB or OP CLB with managed speed active.


PF MCDU..............................................................................................................................PERF CLB
‐ PF MCDU should be showing the PERF CLB page (allowing PF to monitor when the aircraft will
reach the FCU selected altitude) but he may select other pages such as F-PLN page as may be
tactically necessary.
‐ The MCDU PROG page displays OPT FL and MAX REC FL. It is worth noting that this OPT FL is
a function of the cost index (CI).
‐ The displayed MAX REC FL gives the aircraft at least a 0.3 g buffet margin. The pilot may enter a
cruise flight level above this level into the MCDU and the FMGS will accept it, provided that it does
not exceed the level at which the margin is reduced to 0.2 g.
PM MCDU.................................................................................................................................... F-PLN
PM MCDU should be showing the F-PLN page (allowing him to enter any ATC long-term revisions to
the lateral or vertical flight plan).
CLIMB SPEED MODIFICATIONS
 If ATC, turbulence or operational considerations lead to a speed change:
Select the new speed with FCU SPD knob and pull.
Speed target is now “selected”.
To return to managed speed mode, push FCU SPD knob.
The speed target is now “managed”.
Note: The best speed (and rate of climb) for long-term situations lies between green dot
speed and ECON speed. At high altitude, acceleration from green dot to ECON
speed can take a long time.
EXPEDITE CLIMB 
 If ATC requires a rapid climb through a particular level:
Push the EXP pb on the FCU.
The target speed is now green dot speed. FMA :THR CLB /EXP CLB/NAV

PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 4/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
OPERATING MANUAL

Note: Use EXP  only for short-term tactical situations. For the best overall economy fly
at ECON IAS.
To return to ECON CLB speed:
Push ALT knob.
Check FMA: THR CLB/CLB/NAV

BAROMETRIC REFERENCE................................................................... SET STD/CROSSCHECK


At transition altitude (baro setting flashing on PFD) set STD on the EFIS control panel and standby
altimeter.
Cross-check baro settings and altitude readings.
Note: When STD is set on the EFIS control panel, the transponder does not transmit to the
Air Traffic Control (ATC) the standard barometric reference but the last QNH or QFE
previously selected. The transmitted aircraft altitude is not affected. Only the FCU
selected altitude, if used by the ATC, may be misinterpreted.
Upon ATC notification of an incorrect barometric reference value, the flight crew can
select manually a barometric reference of 1 013 hPa and set again STD on the EFIS
control panel.
CRZ FL...................................................................................................................... SET AS RQRD
‐ If ATC clears the aircraft to its intended CRZ FL or above, there is no need to modify the CRZ
FL entered in the INIT A page during cockpit preparation. The MCDU will automatically take into
account a higher CRZ FL selected with the FCU ALT knob.
‐ If ATC limits CRZ FL to a lower level than the one entered in the INIT A page (or present on the
PROG page) the flight crew must insert this lower CRZ FL in the PROG page.
Otherwise there is no transition into CRZ phase : the managed speed targets and Mach are not
modified, and SOFT ALT mode is not available. In that case FMA will display: MACH/ALT/NAV
instead of MACH/ALT CRZ/NAV.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-14-A-00010257.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB CHECKLIST below the line...................................................... COMPLETE


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-14-A-00010258.0001001 / 12 SEP 17
Applicable to: ALL

ENG ANTI-ICE pb-sw ........................................................................................................... AS RQRD


Engine anti-ice must be set to ON when icing conditions (Refer to LIM-ICE_RAIN Definition of Icing
Conditions) exist or are anticipated, except during climb and cruise when the SAT is below - 40 °C
(-40 °F).

PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 5/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SOP-14-A-00013047.0003001 / 03 MAR 14


Applicable to: 1
Impacted DU: 00010259 Climb - Radar

RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE
Gain must be manually set to +4, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below
FL 200.
Note: 1. If the weather is good, or not significant, in order to check that the radar is operating
correctly: down tilt until displaying ground echoes.
2. If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather
situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique.
3. In particular below FL 200, for situations with low-level weather, weather with low
reflectivity or in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to Manual
mode and adjust the tilt setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground
clutter appears on the upper part of the display.
4. In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower
reflectivity targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and Manual
modes to display lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be
displayed as a result of low settings and/or increased gain.
Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SOP-14-A-00013047.0001001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: 2
Impacted DU: 00010259 Climb - Radar

RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE
Gain must be manually set to +8 when, MULTISCAN sw is set to AUTO and when flying below
FL 150.
Note: 1. MULTISCAN AUTO mode provides an efficient ground clutter rejection. During operation
in good or non significant weather conditions, no weather pattern will be displayed on
the ND’s. In this case, the flight crew confirms correct radar operation, using temporarily
MANUAL TILT.
2. The flight crew monitors the weather radar display in AUTO mode, and confirms any
weather display that is ambiguous or unexpected using manual tilt according to standard
techniques.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-14-A-00010259.0001001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: 3

RADAR TILT............................................................................................................................. ADJUST

PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 6/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-14-A-00010259.0002001 / 16 MAR 11


Applicable to: 4
Impacted by TDU: 00013047 Climb - Radar

RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-14-A-00010259.0002001 / 16 MAR 11
Applicable to: 5

RADAR.................................................................................................................... AS APPROPRIATE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-14-A-00010260.0001001 / 17 NOV 20
Applicable to: ALL

AT 10.000FT
LAND LIGHTS selector......................................................................................................RETRACT
SEAT BELTS sw................................................................................................................AS RQRD
EFIS option.........................................................................................................................AS RQRD
Select CSTR on one side, for grid MORA (if available), and ARPT on the other side.
ECAM MEMO....................................................................................................................... REVIEW
NAVAIDS.................................................................................................................................CLEAR
Clear manually tuned VORs from MCDU RAD NAV page.
SEC F-PLN page............................................................................................................... AS RQRD
Recopy the active flight plan in the secondary if an immediate return flight plan has been
constructed previously.
OPT/MAX ALT........................................................................................................................CHECK
On the FMS ACTIVE/PERF page, check the optimum and recommended maximum flight levels.

PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 7/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CLIMB
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-14-A-00020076.0001001 / 17 MAR 17


Applicable to: ALL

10 000 ft FLOW PATTERN

EFIS Option:
The PF will select CSTR for grid MORA
The PM will select ARPT

PRO-NOR-SOP-14 P 8/8
←A 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CRUISE
OPERATING MANUAL

CRUISE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A-00010287.0001001 / 04 JUN 19
Applicable to: ALL
L2
In cruise, the tasksharing is left to the flight crew's appreciation.
L1 ECAM MEMO........................................................................................................................... REVIEW
ECAM SD PAGES....................................................................................................................REVIEW
Periodically review system display pages and, in particular:
ENG : Oil pressure and temperature
BLEED : BLEED parameters
ELEC : Parameters, GEN loads
HYD : A slight decrease in quantity is normal.
Fluid contraction during cold soak can be expected.
Green system is lower than on ground, following landing gear retraction.
FUEL : Fuel distribution.
COND : Duct temperature, compared with zone temperature.
Avoid large differences for passenger comfort.
FLT CTL : Note any unusual control surface position.
DOOR : Oxygen pressure.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A-00010288.0010001 / 16 NOV 20
Applicable to: A321 SHARKLETS

FLIGHT PROGRESS................................................................................................................. CHECK


Monitor flight progress in the conventional way.
When overflying a waypoint:
‐ Check track and distance to the next waypoint.

PRO-NOR-SOP-15 P 1/6
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CRUISE
OPERATING MANUAL

When overflying the waypoint, or at least every 30 min:


‐ Check FUEL:
‐ Check FOB (ECAM) and fuel prediction (FMGC), and compare with the computerized flight plan
of the EFF or use the performance application of the EFB.
‐ Check that the sum of the fuel on board and the fuel used is consistent with the fuel on board at
departure:
• If the sum is unusually smaller than the fuel on board at departure, or if it decreases, suspect
a fuel leak.
For more information about fuel leak, Refer to FCTM/PR-AEP-FUEL Fuel Leak.
• If the sum is unusually greater than the fuel on board at departure, suspect a fuel quantity
overread.
For more information about fuel overread, Refer to FCTM/PR-AEP-FUEL Fuel Overread.

‐ Validate the data that are automatically filled in the navigation log of the EFF.
CAUTION This check must also be performed each time a FUEL IMBALANCE procedure is
necessary. Perform the check before applying the FUEL IMBALANCE procedure.
If a fuel leak is confirmed, apply the FUEL LEAK procedure.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A-00010288.0001001 / 16 NOV 20
Applicable to: OVER

FLIGHT PROGRESS................................................................................................................. CHECK


Monitor flight progress in the conventional way.
When overflying a waypoint:
‐ Check track and distance to the next waypoint.

PRO-NOR-SOP-15 P 2/6
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CRUISE
OPERATING MANUAL

When overflying the waypoint, or at least every 30 min:


‐ Check FUEL:
‐ Check FOB (ECAM) and fuel prediction (FMGC), and compare with the computerized flight plan
or use the performance application of the EFB.
‐ Check that the sum of the fuel on board and the fuel used is consistent with the fuel on board at
departure:
• If the sum is unusually smaller than the fuel on board at departure, or if it decreases, suspect
a fuel leak.
For more information about fuel leak, Refer to FCTM/PR-AEP-FUEL Fuel Leak.
• If the sum is unusually greater than the fuel on board at departure, suspect a fuel quantity
overread.
For more information about fuel overread, Refer to FCTM/PR-AEP-FUEL Fuel Overread.

CAUTION This check must also be performed each time a FUEL IMBALANCE procedure is
necessary. Perform the check before applying the FUEL IMBALANCE procedure.
If a fuel leak is confirmed, apply the FUEL LEAK procedure.

PRO-NOR-SOP-15 P 3/6
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CRUISE
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A-00010289.0001001 / 01 DEC 14


Applicable to: ALL

STEP FLIGHT LEVEL.............................................................................................AS APPROPRIATE


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A-00010290.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

NAV ACCURACY...................................................................................................................MONITOR
On aircraft equipped with GPS primary, no navigation accuracy check is required, as long as GPS
PRIMARY is available.
Otherwise, a navigation accuracy check must be performed especially when any of the following
occurs:
‐ GPS PRIMARY LOST appears on the ND ( GPS  )
‐ IRS only navigation
‐ The PROG page displays LOW accuracy
‐ “NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD” appears on the MCDU.
Refer to DSC-22_20-20-20 Estimated Position Uncertainty.
Note: Methods for checking accuracy:
 If the check is positive (error ≤ 3 N.m): FM position is reliable.
Use ND (ARC or NAV) and managed lateral guidance.
 If the check is negative (error > 3 N.m): FM position is not reliable.
Use raw data for navigation and monitor it.
 If there is a significant mismatch between the display and the real position:
Disengage MANAGED NAV mode and use raw data navigation (possibly switching
to ROSE VOR, so as not to be misled by FM data).
Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A-00013068.0001001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: 1
Impacted DU: 00010291 Cruise - Radar Tilt

RADAR ...................................................................................................................AS APPROPRIATE


Gain must be manually set to +8, when MULTISCAN sw is set to AUTO and when flying below
FL 150.

PRO-NOR-SOP-15 P 4/6
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CRUISE
OPERATING MANUAL

Note: 1. MULTISCAN AUTO mode provides an efficient ground clutter rejection. During operation
in good or non significant weather conditions, no weather pattern will be displayed on
the ND’s. In this case, the flight crew confirms correct radar operation, using temporarily
MANUAL TILT.
2. The flight crew monitors the weather radar display in AUTO mode, and confirms any
weather display that is ambiguous or unexpected using manual tilt according to standard
techniques.
Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A-00013068.0006001 / 20 SEP 16
Applicable to: 2
Impacted DU: 00010291 Cruise - Radar Tilt

RADAR ...................................................................................................................AS APPROPRIATE


Gain must be manually set to +4, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below
FL 200.
Note: 1. If the weather is good, or not significant, in order to check that the radar is operating
correctly: down tilt until displaying ground echoes.
2. If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather
situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique.
3. In particular below FL 200, for situations with low-level weather, weather with low
reflectivity or in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to Manual
mode and adjust the tilt setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground
clutter appears on the upper part of the display.
4. In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower
reflectivity targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and Manual
modes to display lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be
displayed as a result of low settings and/or increased gain.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A-00010291.0001001 / 07 MAR 13
Applicable to: 3

RADAR TILT............................................................................................................................. ADJUST


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A-00010291.0002001 / 07 MAR 13
Applicable to: 4
Impacted by TDU: 00013068 Cruise - Radar Tilt

RADAR ...................................................................................................................AS APPROPRIATE


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A-00010291.0002001 / 07 MAR 13
Applicable to: 5

RADAR ...................................................................................................................AS APPROPRIATE

PRO-NOR-SOP-15 P 5/6
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - CRUISE
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-15-A-00010296.0001001 / 21 MAR 16


Applicable to: ALL

 If the oxygen mask has been used:


OXYGEN MASK ................................................................................................................. CHECK
Check that the oxygen mask has been properly stowed, Refer to DSC-35-20-10 General.

PRO-NOR-SOP-15 P 6/6
←A 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

DESCENT PREPARATION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00011551.0001001 / 30 JUN 14
Applicable to: ALL

Descent preparation and approach briefing should be completed before top of descent.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00011552.0006001 / 17 NOV 20
Applicable to: ALL

WEATHER AND LANDING INFORMATION.............................................................................OBTAIN


Check weather reports at ALTERNATE and DESTINATION airports. Airfield data should include
runway in use for arrival.
NAV CHARTS CLIPBOARD..................................................................................................PREPARE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00014394.0007001 / 28 MAY 20
Applicable to: ALL

LANDING CONDITIONS........................................................................................................CONFIRM
Perform an in-flight landing performance assessment if the landing conditions changed compared
with the landing distance computation at dispatch, or with a previous computation (e.g. runway,
weather conditions, in-flight failure affecting performance, diversion).
For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-160 Landing Performance
Note: 1. If the weather conditions are expected to change at the landing airport, or in the event
of significant precipitation, the flight crew should consider a second calculation of the
in-flight landing distance with the worst possible runway condition.
2. The selection of REV MAX is the standard practice for landing.
However, on DRY runways the flight crew may select REV IDLE.
On WET runways (runway surface condition GOOD), the flight crew may select REV
IDLE, if all the following conditions are satisfied:
‐ A landing distance assessment has been made with the following parameters:
• MEDIUM TO POOR landing performance level for the in-flight landing distance
computation
• No reverser credit
‐ The result of this landing distance assessment is within the LDA.

 If landing conditions changed:


LANDING PERF DATA.................................................................................................. COMPUTE
The PF and the PM independently compute the landing distance performance data, based on the
new conditions at arrival.

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 1/12
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

In the LDG PERF application, modify the selections in accordance with the estimated arrival
conditions:
‐ In the AIRPORT/RUNWAY part, select the applicable runway
‐ In the CONDITIONS part, enter the estimated landing conditions
‐ In the AIRCRAFT STATUS part, check the selected items, if any
‐ Launch the computation and check the results versus Airline policy or applicable regulations.
LANDING PERF DATA...........................................................................................CROSSCHECK
The PF and the PM compare their EFB to ensure that the computations are the same.
For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-160 Landing Performance.

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 2/12
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

In the LDG PERF application, modify the selections in accordance with the estimated arrival
conditions:
‐ In the AIRPORT/RUNWAY part, select the applicable runway
‐ In the CONDITIONS part, enter the estimated landing conditions
‐ In the AIRCRAFT STATUS part, check the selected items, if any
‐ Launch the computation and check the results versus Airline policy or applicable regulations.
LANDING PERF DATA...........................................................................................CROSSCHECK
The PF and the PM compare their EFB to ensure that the computations are the same.
For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-160 Landing Performance.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00020100.0001001 / 17 MAY 17
Applicable to: ALL

ARRIVAL page...................................................................................................... COMPLETE/CHECK


Insert APPR, STAR, APPR VIA and TRANS if applicable. (Access by lateral revision at destination.)
F-PLN A page............................................................................................................................ CHECK
‐ Ensure that the inserted F-PLN agrees with planned approach and missed approach.
‐ Use the scroll key to check the F-PLN thoroughly, using ND in PLAN mode as necessary.
Tracks and distances between waypoints are displayed on the second line from the top of the
MCDU. Approach and Missed Approach tracks and distances must be checked from the appropriate
navigation charts.

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 3/12
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

‐ Check speed constraints. Add new speed constraints if required.


‐ Check altitude constraints. Add new altitude constraints if required.
Note: The FMS may have deleted the altitude constraints that are at or above the CRZ
FL, or at or above any previous lower CRZ FL in the case of step climbs (Refer to
DSC-22_20-30-20-05 Vertical Constraints (Speed, Altitude, Time)).
In that case,
‐ Insert again the affected procedures (STAR, APPR VIA or TRANS)
The FMS keeps the altitude constraints that are below the CRZ FL, and deletes again
the altitude constraints that are above current CRZ FL. The FMS may also delete the
altitude constraints that are at current CRZ FL, and the altitude constraint windows that
have a constraint at or above current CRZ FL.
‐ Manually enter the altitude constraints that are below current CRZ FL using the MCDU
Vertical Revision pages.
It is not possible to enter an altitude constraint at the CRZ FL.
In the case of an "AT" or "AT OR ABOVE" altitude constraint at the CRZ FL, the flight
crew must select the DES mode only after the aircraft reaches the position of the
altitude constraint to prevent an early descent..

‐ In all cases, do not modify the final approach (FAF to runway or MAP), including altitude
constraints.
‐ Identify the position and the altitude of Final Descent Point (FDP) and check the value of the FPA
after this FDP,
‐ If a TOO STEEP PATH message is displayed after the FDP, do not use FINAL APP guidance for
approach.
‐ Identify the Missed Approach Point.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00020101.0001001 / 20 SEP 16
Applicable to: ALL

DES WIND page........................................................................................................................ CHECK


Enter winds for descent before T/D.
Note: With DPO  , as the idle thrust margins are reduced, accurate winds have to be entered
to be able to follow the computed vertical profile and thus maximize the benefits of DPO 
. Refer to DSC-22_20-60-150 Descent Profile Optimization (if installed).
PERF CRUISE page.................................................................................................................. CHECK
Modify the cabin descent rate if different pressure rate is required.

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 4/12
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

PERF DES page........................................................................................................................ CHECK


Prior to descent, access PERF DES page and check ECON MACH/SPD. If a speed other than
ECON is required, insert that MACH or SPD into the ECON field. This new MACH or SPD is now the
one for the descent path and T/D computation, and it will be used for the managed speed descent
profile (instead of ECON).
A speed limit of 250 kt below 10 000 ft is the defaulted speed, in the managed speed descent profile.
The flight crew may delete or modify it if necessary on the VERT REV at DEST page.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00020102.0001001 / 01 MAR 18
Applicable to: A321 CEO A319/20 V2500

PERF APPR page................................................................................................. COMPLETE/CHECK


Enter the QNH, temperature, and wind at destination.
L13
Note: Insert the average wind given by the ATC or ATIS. Do not insert the gust value. During
approach, the Ground Speed Mini function (manage speed mode) takes into account the
instantaneous gust.
For more information: Refer to Ground Speed Mini Function
For example, if the wind is 15020G35KT, insert 150/20.
Insert the minimum.
Note: To avoid undershooting the published minimum during go-around, due to aircraft inertia
during pull-up, some Authorities may require Operators to add a specific number of feet to
the published minimum.
CAUTION If the QNH altimeter setting is used for an aircraft with the QFE option  , consider
FCOM - Aircraft Systems - Flight Management - How to - Insertion of Approach
Minima - QNH use for aircraft equipped with QFE option.
Note: Changing the RWY or the type of approach automatically erases the previous minimum.
Note: After the activation of the SEC F-PLN, check the VAPP, and modify if necessary.
Check or modify the landing configuration. Always select the landing configuration on the PERF APP
page: CONF FULL in the normal landing configuration. CONF 3 should be considered, depending
on the available runway length and go-around performance, or if windshear/severe turbulence is
considered possible during approach.
Check or modify the transition altitude.
PERF GO-AROUND page.......................................................................................... CHECK/MODIFY
Check THR RED ALT and ACC ALT, and modify, if necessary.

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 5/12
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00020102.0002001 / 01 MAR 18


Applicable to: LEAP1A A319/20 CFM

PERF APPR page................................................................................................. COMPLETE/CHECK


Enter the QNH, temperature, and wind at destination.
L13
Note: Insert the average wind given by the ATC or ATIS. Do not insert the gust value. During
approach, the Ground Speed Mini function (manage speed mode) takes into account the
instantaneous gust.
For more information: Refer to Ground Speed Mini Function
For example, if the wind is 15020G35KT, insert 150/20.
Insert the minimum.
Note: To avoid undershooting the published minimum during go-around, due to aircraft inertia
during pull-up, some Authorities may require Operators to add a specific number of feet to
the published minimum.
CAUTION If the QNH altimeter setting is used for an aircraft with the QFE option  , consider
FCOM - Aircraft Systems - Flight Management - How to - Insertion of Approach
Minima - QNH use for aircraft equipped with QFE option.
Note: Changing the RWY or the type of approach automatically erases the previous minimum.
Note: After the activation of the SEC F-PLN, check the VAPP, and modify if necessary.
Check or modify the landing configuration. Always select the landing configuration on the PERF APP
page: CONF FULL in the normal landing configuration. CONF 3 should be considered, depending
on the available runway length and go-around performance, or if windshear/severe turbulence is
considered possible during approach.
If the forecasted tailwind at landing is greater than 10 kt , refer to "LIM-12-Airport Operations and
Wind Limitations" for the recommended/required landing configuration.
Check or modify the transition altitude.
PERF GO-AROUND page.......................................................................................... CHECK/MODIFY
Check THR RED ALT and ACC ALT, and modify, if necessary.

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 6/12
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00020103.0001001 / 20 SEP 16


Applicable to: ALL

RAD NAV page.......................................................................................................................... CHECK


‐ Set navaids, as required, and check idents on the NDs (VOR-ADF) and PFDs (ILS, GLS  , MLS
 ). If a VOR/DME exists close to the airfield, select it and enter its ident in the BRG/DIST field of
the PROG page, for NAV ACCY monitoring during descent.
‐ When the flight plan calls for an NDB approach, the system automatically tunes the ADF, only
when the aircraft is passing the first fix of the approach. Therefore, it is convenient to manually
tune the ADF earlier (before activating the approach phase).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00020104.0001001 / 20 SEP 16
Applicable to: ALL

SEC F-PLN page................................................................................................................... AS RQRD


Before the top of descent, the SEC F-PLN should either be set to an alternate runway for destination,
or to the landing runway in case of circling. In all cases, routing to the alternate should be available.
If there is a last-minute runway change, then the flight crew only needs to activate the secondary
F-PLN , without forgetting to check/set the new minimum and navaids.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00023278.0001001 / 28 MAY 20
Applicable to: ALL

FMS PREPARATION................................................................................................................. CHECK


After the PF prepares the FMS, the PM checks all the data entered in the FMS.
For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-160 Landing Performance.

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 7/12
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00011554.0001001 / 03 MAR 14


Applicable to: ALL

GPWS LDG FLAP 3 pb-sw....................................................................................................AS RQRD


If the pilot plans on landing in FLAPS 3 configuration, the GPWS LDG FLAP 3 pb-sw should be set to
ON.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00015490.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

LDG ELEV..................................................................................................................................CHECK
Check that the LDG ELEV AUTO green is displayed on the ECAM CRUISE page, and check the
associated value.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00011556.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

AUTO BRK ............................................................................................................................AS RQRD


Use of autobrake is preferable.
Use of MAX mode is not recommended at landing.
On short or contaminated runways, use MED mode.
On long runways, LO mode is recommended.
L2 For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-160 Brakes Oxidation.

L1 Note: If, on very long runways, the flight crew anticipates that braking will not be needed, use of
the autobrake is not necessary.
Firmly press the appropriate pushbutton, according to the runway length and condition, and check
that the related ON light comes on.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00011555.0001001 / 10 JUL 14
Applicable to: ALL

APPROACH BRIEFING........................................................................................................ PERFORM


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00011547.0001001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: ALL

TERR ON ND  .................................................................................................................AS RQRD


‐ In mountainous areas, consider displaying terrain on ND.
‐ If use of radar is required, consider selecting the radar display on the PF side, and TERR ON ND
on the PM side only.
‐ If NAV ACCURACY is LOW, do not use TERR on ND.

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 8/12
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00013353.0003001 / 03 MAR 14


Applicable to: 1
Impacted DU: 00011545 Descent Preparation - Radar

RADAR.....................................................................................................ADJUST AS APPROPRIATE
Gain must be manually set to +4, when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying below
FL 200.
Note: 1. If the weather is good, or not significant, in order to check that the radar is operating
correctly: down tilt until displaying ground echoes.
2. If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather
situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique.
3. In particular below FL 200, for situations with low-level weather, weather with low
reflectivity or in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to Manual
mode and adjust the tilt setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground
clutter appears on the upper part of the display.
4. In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower
reflectivity targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and Manual
modes to display lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be
displayed as a result of low settings and/or increased gain.
Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00013353.0001001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: 2
Impacted DU: 00011545 Descent Preparation - Radar

RADAR.....................................................................................................ADJUST AS APPROPRIATE
Gain must be manually set to +8 when, MULTISCAN sw is set to AUTO and when flying below
FL 150.
Note: 1. MULTISCAN AUTO mode provides an efficient ground clutter rejection. During operation
in good or non significant weather conditions, no weather pattern will be displayed on
the ND’s. In this case, the flight crew confirms correct radar operation, using temporarily
MANUAL TILT.
2. The flight crew monitors the weather radar display in AUTO mode, and confirms any
weather display that is ambiguous or unexpected using manual tilt according to standard
techniques.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00011545.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: 3
Impacted by TDU: 00013353 Descent Preparation - Radar

RADAR.....................................................................................................ADJUST AS APPROPRIATE

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 9/12
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00011545.0001001 / 03 MAR 14


Applicable to: 4

RADAR.....................................................................................................ADJUST AS APPROPRIATE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00011558.0001001 / 02 MAY 17
Applicable to: V2500

CAUTION In icing conditions (Refer to LIM-ICE_RAIN Definition of Icing Conditions), the flight
crew must turn on the engine anti-ice and should not wait until seeing ice building
up.
ENG ANTI-ICE pb-sw ........................................................................................................... AS RQRD
Engine anti-ice must be set to ON before and during descent, even If the SAT is below -40 °C (-40
°F).
When ENG ANTI ICE is ON, the FADEC automatically controls continuous ignition and selects a
higher idle thrust which gives better protection against flame-out. The IGNITION memo appears on
the ECAM.
WING ANTI ICE pb-sw .........................................................................................................AS RQRD
When icing conditions are encountered:
‐ The flight crew may turn on the wing anti-ice to prevent the ice accretion on the wing leading edge.
‐ The flight crew must turn on the wing anti-ice if there is evidence of ice accretion, such as ice on
the visual indicators, or on the wipers, or with the SEVERE ICE DETECTED  alert. This is to
remove any ice accumulation on the wing leading edge.
ANTI ICE ON reduces the descent path angle (when the engines are at idle). The pilot can
compensate for this by increasing the descent speed, or by extending up to half speedbrakes.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00011558.0004001 / 02 MAY 17
Applicable to: CFM LEAP1A

CAUTION In icing conditions (Refer to LIM-ICE_RAIN Definition of Icing Conditions), the flight
crew must turn on the engine anti-ice and should not wait until seeing ice building
up.
ENG ANTI-ICE pb-sw ........................................................................................................... AS RQRD
Engine anti-ice must be set to ON before and during descent, event if the SAT is below -40 °C (-40
°F).
When ENG ANTI ICE is ON, the FADEC selects a higher idle thrust which gives better protection
against flame-out.

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 10/12
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

WING ANTI ICE pb-sw .........................................................................................................AS RQRD


When icing conditions are encountered:
‐ The flight crew may turn on the wing anti-ice to prevent ice accretion on the wing leading edge.
‐ The flight crew must turn on the wing anti-ice if there is evidence of ice accretion, such as ice on
the visual indicators, or on the wipers, or with the SEVERE ICE DETECTED  alert. This is to
remove any ice accumulation from the wing leading edge.
ANTI ICE ON reduces the descent path angle (when the engines are at idle). The pilot can
compensate for this by increasing the descent speed, or by extending up to half speedbrakes.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-16-A-00011557.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

DESCENT CLEARANCE...........................................................................................................OBTAIN
CLEARED ALTITUDE ON FCU...................................................................................................... SET
When clearance is obtained, set the ATC-cleared altitude (FL) on the FCU (also considering what is
the safe altitude).
If the lowest safe altitude is higher than the ATC-cleared altitude, check with the ATC that this
constraint applies.
If it is confirmed, set the FCU altitude to the safe altitude, until it is safe to go to the ATC-cleared
altitude.

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 11/12
←A 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT PREPARATION
OPERATING MANUAL

Intentionally left blank

PRO-NOR-SOP-16 P 12/12
18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT
OPERATING MANUAL

DESCENT INITIATION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-17-00011541.0001001 / 03 NOV 14
Applicable to: ALL

DESCENT................................................................................................................................ INITIATE
The normal method of initiating the descent is to select DES mode at the FMGS calculated top of
descent (T/D).
 If ATC requires an early descent:
Use DES mode which will guide the aircraft down at a lower vertical speed in order to converge
on the required descent path. (The pilot may use a V/S of -1 000 ft/min).
 If ATC delays the descent:
Beyond T/D, the PFD and the MCDU display either "DECELERATE" or "T/D REACHED"
message. This suggests to the crew that it starts reducing speed towards green dot speed (with
ATC permission). When cleared to descend, select DES mode with managed speed active.

DESCENT MONITORING
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-17-00011542.0003001 / 23 DEC 14
Applicable to: ALL

PF MCDU ............................................................................................................... PROG/PERF DES


PF MCDU should be set to PROG or PERF DES page:
‐ PROG page in order to get VDEV or RQD DIST TO LAND/DIRECT DIST TO DEST information
‐ PERF DES in order to get predictions down to any inserted altitude in DES/OP DES modes and
EXP mode  .
PM MCDU .................................................................................................................................. F-PLN
DESCENT............................................................................................................... MONITOR/ADJUST
Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-60 Descent Monitoring - DES Mode Engaged

PRO-NOR-SOP-17 P 1/6
A to B → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT
OPERATING MANUAL

‐ When flying in NAV mode, use DES mode.


The aircraft descends along the descent flight path: the PFD and PROG page display VDEV, and
so it can be monitored. All constraints of the flight plan are taken into account for the guidance.
‐ When the aircraft is flying in HDG or TRK mode, and thus out of the lateral F-PLN, DES mode is
not available.
The NDs show a level-off symbol along the flight path. Its position is based on the current active
modes .AP/FD and A/THR
The flight crew can use this symbol to monitor the descent.
MCDU predictions assume a return to the lateral F-PLN and descent flight path.
Note that whenever the lateral mode is changed from NAV to HDG/TRK the vertical mode reverts
to V/S at the value pertaining at the time of the mode change.
‐ From time to time during stabilized descent, the flight crew may select FPA to check that the
remaining distance to destination is approximately the altitude change required divided by the FPA
in degrees.
FPA (°) = ΔFL/DIST (NM)

DESCENT ADJUSTMENT
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-17-A-00011543.0002001 / 09 MAR 15
Applicable to: ALL

To increase the rate of descent:


‐ Increase descent speed (by use of selected speed) if comfort and ATC permit. It is economically
better (Time/Fuel) than the following procedures.
‐ Maintain high speed as long as possible. (SPD LIM may be suspended, subject to ATC
clearance).
‐ If the aircraft is high and at high speed, it is more efficient to keep the high speed to ALT* and
decelerate, rather than to mix descent and deceleration.
‐ If the aircraft goes below the desired profile, use SPEED and the V/S mode to adjust the rate of
descent.
Note: EXPEDITE DESCENT.
If a high rate of descent is required, push the EXPED pushbutton  on the FCU. The
target speed for the descent now becomes M 0.8 or 340 kt, whichever is lower. The FMA
will display THRIDLE/EXP DES/NAV.
To return to DES mode, push the FCU ALT knob.
To return to SPEED/V/S modes, pull the FCU V/S knob.
In all cases, monitor the FMA to ensure that the mode engages properly.

PRO-NOR-SOP-17 P 2/6
← B to C → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-17-A-00011544.0001001 / 03 MAR 14


Applicable to: ALL

If engine anti-ice is selected in descent, the flight idle is increased. So, to maintain the rate of
descent that the airplane had before engine anti-ice selection it may be necessary to use up to half
speedbrakes to maintain the required rate of descent, in OPEN DES vertical mode. If the rate of
descent has to be increased, full speedbrakes may be used.
In DES mode: If the aircraft is on, or below, the flight path and the ATC requires a higher rate of
descent, do not use speedbrakes because the rate of descent is dictated by the planned flight path.
Thus, the A/THR may increase thrust to compensate for the increase in drag. In this case, use OPEN
DES with speedbrakes.
Note: 1. If speedbrakes are used above 315 kt/M .75, with the AP engaged, their rate of retraction
is low (total time for retraction from full extension is approximately 25 s). The ECAM
memo page displays SPD BRAKES in amber until retraction is complete.
2. In order to avoid overshooting the altitude, due to speedbrake retraction in ALT* mode,
retract the speedbrakes at least 2 000 ft before the selected altitude.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-17-A-00011546.0001001 / 14 JAN 16
Applicable to: A319/20 V2500 LEAP1A

BAROMETRIC REFERENCE.......................................................................................................... SET


Set QNH on the EFIS control panel and on the standby altimeter, when approaching the transition
level and when cleared for an altitude.
Crosscheck BARO settings and altitude readings.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-17-A-00011546.0002001 / 14 JAN 16
Applicable to: A321 CEO A319/20 CFM

BAROMETRIC REFERENCE.......................................................................................................... SET


Set QNH (or QFE) on the EFIS control panel and on the standby altimeter, when approaching the
transition level and when cleared for an altitude.
Crosscheck BARO settings and altitude readings.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-17-A-00011548.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

ECAM STATUS..........................................................................................................................CHECK
‐ Check that there is no status reminder on the upper ECAM display.
‐ If there is a status reminder, check the aircraft STATUS.
‐ Check the ECAM status page before completing the approach checks. Take particular note of any
degradation in landing capability, or any other aspect affecting the approach and landing.

PRO-NOR-SOP-17 P 3/6
←C→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-17-A-00021715.0001001 / 04 SEP 17


Applicable to: ALL

AT 10 000 FT
LAND lights selector.................................................................................................................... SET
LAND lights may be switched ON, according to the airline policy/regulatory recommendations.
SEAT BELTS sw........................................................................................................................... ON
EFIS option pb.......................................................................................................................... CSTR
Select CSTR on both sides.
ILS/LS pb............................................................................................................................AS RQRD
Press the ILS/LS pb, if one of the following approaches is planned:
‐ ILS, GLS  , MLS 
‐ ILS G/S out, LOC only or LOC B/C 
‐ Approach with the FLS function 
The flight crew checks that:
‐ Deviation scales are displayed on the PFD
‐ The IDENT is properly displayed on the PFD
RAD NAVAIDS............................................................................................SELECTED/IDENTIFIED
Ensure that appropriate radio NAVAIDS are tuned and identified.
For NDB approaches, manually select the reference NAVAID.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-17-A-00015500.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: A321 CEO

ENG MODE selector..............................................................................................................AS RQRD


‐ Select IGN if the runway is covered with standing water, or if heavy rain or severe turbulence is
expected during approach or go-around area.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-17-A-00015501.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

NAV ACCURACY....................................................................................................................... CHECK


On aircraft equipped with GPS primary, no navigation accuracy check is required, as long as GPS
PRIMARY function is available.
Otherwise, crosscheck NAV ACCURACY using the PROG page (BRG/DIST computed data), and
the ND (VOR/DME raw data).

PRO-NOR-SOP-17 P 4/6
←C 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT
OPERATING MANUAL

APPROACH CHECKLIST
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-17-00014491.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

APPROACH CHECKLIST
APPROACH CHECKLIST............................................................................................PERFORMED

PRO-NOR-SOP-17 P 5/6
D 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - DESCENT
OPERATING MANUAL

10 000 FT FLOW PATTERN


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-17-00020073.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

10 000 ft FLOW PATTERN

PRO-NOR-SOP-17 P 6/6
E 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Approach General

INTRODUCTION
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A-00014490.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

The APPROACH section provides the standard operating procedures for the following approach
types:
‐ ILS / MLS  / GLS  approaches
‐ Conventional approaches: VOR, VOR-DME, NDB, NDB-DME
‐ Approaches based on a LOC signal without any G/S signal: LOC ONLY, ILS G/S OUT, LOC B/C
‐ RNAV approaches including:
• RNAV(GNSS) approaches with LNAV minimum or LNAV/VNAV minimum
• RNAV(RNP) approaches for which Authorization is Required (AR) - If capability installed.
Note: In relation to the names in the ICAO Performance-Based Navigation (PBN) Manual:
‐ "RNP APCH operations" corresponds to RNAV(GNSS) approaches
‐ "RNP AR APCH operations" corresponds to RNAV(RNP) approaches.

CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A-00014489.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

This table provides Guidance Modes that may be used depending on the Approach Types.
Guidance Modes per Approach Types
LOC G/S FINAL APP LOC FPA NAV FPA TRK FPA
ILS / MLS  Refer to APPR
N/A N/A N/A N/A
/ GLS  using LOC G/S
Refer to APPR
LOC ONLY
N/A N/A using FPA N/A N/A
ILS G/S OUT Guidance
Refer to APPR
LOC B/C N/A N/A N/A N/A using FPA
Guidance
RNAV(GNSS)
Refer to APPR
with LNAV/VNAV N/A
using FINAL APP
N/A Not Authorized Not Authorized
minima
Refer to Refer to APPR
RNAV(GNSS) with
N/A APPR using N/A using FPA Not Authorized
LNAV minima FINAL APP (1) Guidance
Continued on the following page

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A P 1/6
A to B → 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Continued from the previous page


Guidance Modes per Approach Types
LOC G/S FINAL APP LOC FPA NAV FPA TRK FPA
RNAV(GNSS)
N/A Not Authorized N/A Not Authorized Not Authorized
with LPV minima
VOR
Refer to Refer to APPR Refer to APPR
VOR-DME
N/A APPR using N/A using FPA using FPA
NDB FINAL APP (1) Guidance Guidance
NDB-DME
(1)  The FINAL APP is the recommended guidance mode for this type of approach.
For Visual Approach, Refer to Visual Approach
For Circling Approach, Refer to Circling Approach

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A P 2/6
←B→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

FLYING REFERENCE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A-00014488.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

Use the following recommended flying reference:


‐ In vertical managed modes: HDG-V/S reference associated with the FD crossbars
‐ In vertical selected modes: TRK-FPA reference associated with FPD.

STABILIZATION CRITERIA
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A-00014487.0001001 / 09 FEB 18
Applicable to: CFM V2500 A321/A319

The stabilization height is defined as one of the following:


‐ 1 000 ft above airfield elevation (AAL)in Instrument Meteorological Conditions (IMC), or
‐ 500 ft above airfield elevation (AAL) in Visual Meteorological Conditions (VMC), or
‐ Any other height defined in Operator policies or regulations.
In order for the approach to be stabilized, all of the following conditions must be satisfied before, or at
the stabilization height:
‐ The aircraft is on the correct lateral and vertical flight path
‐ The aircraft is in the desired landing configuration

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A P 3/6
← B to D → 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

‐ The thrust is stabilized, usually above idle, and the aircraft is at target speed for approach
Note: In IMC, a later speed and thrust stabilization can be acceptable provided that:
‐ It is in accordance with Operator policies and regulations
‐ The aircraft is in deceleration toward the target approach speed
‐ The flight crew stabilizes speed and thrust as soon as possible and not later than
500 ft AAL.
‐ The flight crew does not detect any excessive flight parameter deviation.
If one of the above-mentioned conditions is not satisfied, the flight crew must initiate a go-around,
unless they estimate that only small corrections are required to recover stabilized approach
conditions.

STABILIZATION CRITERIA
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A-00014487.0002001 / 09 FEB 18
Applicable to: CFM A320 LEAP1A

The stabilization height is defined as one of the following:


‐ 1 000 ft above airfield elevation (AAL)in Instrument Meteorological Conditions (IMC), or
‐ 500 ft above airfield elevation (AAL) in Visual Meteorological Conditions (VMC), or
‐ Any other height defined in Operator policies or regulations.
In order for the approach to be stabilized, all of the following conditions must be satisfied before, or at
the stabilization height:
‐ The aircraft is on the correct lateral and vertical flight path
‐ The aircraft is in the desired landing configuration
‐ The thrust is stabilized, usually above idle, and the aircraft is at target speed for approach
Note: In IMC, a later speed and thrust stabilization can be acceptable provided that:
‐ It is in accordance with Operator policies and regulations
‐ The aircraft is in deceleration toward the target approach speed
‐ The flight crew stabilizes speed and thrust as soon as possible and not later than
500 ft AAL.
‐ The flight crew does not detect any excessive flight parameter deviation.
If one of the above-mentioned conditions is not satisfied, the flight crew must initiate a go-around,
unless they estimate that only small corrections are required to recover stabilized approach
conditions.
Note: If the predicted tailwind at landing is greater than 10 kt, decelerated approach is not
permitted, and the aircraft speed should be stabilized at around VREF + 5 kt in final.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A P 4/6
←D 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

APPROACH SPEED TECHNIQUE


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A-00014485.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

DECELERATED APPROACH
The decelerated approach with FD or AP/FD guidance is the standard flying technique for ILS /
MLS  / GLS  approaches and approaches using FLS  or FINAL APP guidance.
EARLY STABILIZED APPROACH
Under certain circumstances, the flight crew may decide to reduce the speed down to VAPP in the
landing configuration at the Final Descent Point (i.e. approach via selected guidance, high glide
path angle, low altitude intermediate approach, etc.). In order to obtain a valuable deceleration
pseudo waypoint and to ensure a timely deceleration, the flight crew should enter VAPP as a
speed constraint at the Final Descent Point.

DISCONTINUED APPROACH
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A-00015226.0001001 / 03 DEC 13
Applicable to: ALL

In order to discontinue an approach when the aircraft is at or above the altitude selected on the
FCU, the flight crew can either:
‐ Apply the GO AROUND procedure, or
‐ Apply the discontinued approach technique.
When the aircraft is below the FCU altitude, the flight crew must apply the GO AROUND
procedure.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A P 5/6
E to F → 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

 If at or above the FCU altitude:


Announce "CANCEL APPROACH".
To disarm any AP/FD approach mode, press APPR pb or LOC pb.
Note: Valid only for ILS / MLS  / GLS  / FLS  or FINAL APP guidance.
Select lateral mode as required (NAV or HDG mode).
Select vertical mode as required (level off or adjust V/S).
Select SPEED and adjust.
 If F-PLN has no destination anymore:
Perform a LAT REV at the last waypoint and redefine the destination in the NEW DEST field.
Note: 1. The FMS does not automatically string the previous flown approach in the active F-PLN
when the aircraft overflies the last waypoint. The FMS has no more destination in the
F-PLN.
2. Because the thrust levers are not set to TOGA detent, the FMS remains in approach
phase.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-A P 6/6
←F 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Aircraft Configuration Management

INITIAL APPROACH
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-A-00014494.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

GENERAL
The initial approach procedure described here is a general guidance whatever the type of
approach expected.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-A-00014493.0001001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

INITIAL APPROACH
F-PLN SEQUENCING...........................................................................................................ADJUST
‐ The NAV mode will be available after GO AROUND if the F-PLN is properly sequenced. A good
cue to monitor the proper F-PLN sequencing is the TO waypoint on the upper right side of the
ND, which should remain meaningful.
‐ In NAV mode, the F-PLN will sequence automatically.
‐ In HDG/TRK mode, the F-PLN will sequence automatically only if the aircraft flies close to the
F-PLN route.
APPROACH PHASE............................................................................................CHECK/ACTIVATE
‐ If the aircraft overflies the DECEL pseudo waypoint in NAV mode, the APPR phase activates
automatically.
‐ If the aircraft is in HDG/TRK mode, approximately 15 NM from touchdown, activate and confirm
APPROACH phase on the MCDU (PERF DES page).
MANAGED SPEED................................................................................................................ CHECK
‐ If ATC requires a particular speed, use selected speed. When the ATC speed constraint no
longer applies, return to managed speed.
FLIGHT PATH....................................................................................................................MONITOR
‐ In NAV mode, use VDEV information on the PFD and PROG page.
‐ In HDG/TRK mode, use the energy circle on ND representing the required distance to land.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B P 1/12
A→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

SPEED BRAKES lever.......................................................................................................AS RQRD


‐ If the flight crew uses the speed brakes to increase the rate of deceleration or to increase the
rate of descent, the VLS will increase as well:
• The flight crew should ensure that appropriate speed margin exists before the extension of
the speed brakes
• If the speed brakes are extended, the flight crew should ensure that appropriate speed
margin exists before the beginning of a turn.
This will avoid the activation of the Alpha-Floor protection.
Note: In clean configuration, the VLS with speed brakes fully extended may be higher than
green dot speed or VFE FLAP 1.

Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-A-00014648.0002001 / 23 JUN 15


Applicable to: 1
Impacted DU: 00014647 Initial Approach - Radar

RADAR
RADAR................................................................................................. ADJUST AS APPROPRIATE
‐ Gain must be manually set to +8 when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying
below FL 150.
‐ MULTISCAN AUTO mode provides an efficient ground clutter rejection. During operations in
good or non significant weather conditions, no weather pattern will be displayed on the NDs. In
this case, the flight crew confirms correct radar operation, using temporarily MANUAL TILT.
‐ The flight crew monitors the weather radar display in AUTO mode, and confirms any weather
display that is ambiguous or unexpected using manual tilt according to standard techniques.
Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-A-00014648.0003001 / 03 MAR 14
Applicable to: 2
Impacted DU: 00014647 Initial Approach - Radar

RADAR
RADAR................................................................................................. ADJUST AS APPROPRIATE
‐ Gain must be manually set to +4 when MULTISCAN selector is set to AUTO and when flying
below FL 200.
‐ If the weather is good, or not significant, in order to check that the radar is operating correctly:
down tilt under displaying ground echoes.
‐ If the weather display is ambiguous or unexpected, in order to better analyze the weather
situation, use manual tilt according to standard technique.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B P 2/12
←A→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

‐ In particular below FL 200, for situations with low level weather, weather with low reflectivity or
in front of suspected active cells, the flight crew should switch to manual mode and adjust the tilt
setting downward until the weather is detected or the ground clutter appears on the upper part
of the display.
‐ In addition, the flight crew may increase the manual gain control to display lower reflectivity
targets. The manual gain control can be increased in both AUTO and manual modes to display
lower levels of weather. In both cases, ground clutter may also be displayed as a result of low
settings and/or increased gain.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-A-00014647.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: 3
Impacted by TDU: 00014648 Initial Approach - Radar

RADAR
RADAR................................................................................................. ADJUST AS APPROPRIATE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-A-00014647.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: 4

RADAR
RADAR................................................................................................. ADJUST AS APPROPRIATE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-A-00014492.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

NAVIGATION ACCURACY
NAV ACCURACY...............................................................................................................MONITOR
‐ When GPS PRIMARY is available, no NAV ACCURACY monitoring is required.
‐ If GPS PRIMARY is lost, or GPS not installed, check on PROG page that the required
navigation accuracy is appropriate to the phase of flight.
‐ If NAV ACCURACY is LOW, at least one ND must be in ROSE LS/VOR depending on the
approach.

INTERMEDIATE/FINAL APPROACH
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-B-00014501.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

GENERAL
The intermediate and final approach procedure described here is general guidance whatever the
type of approach expected.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B P 3/12
← A to B → 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-B-00014500.0001001 / 17 MAR 17


Applicable to: A319/20

AT GREEN DOT SPEED


CAUTION The flight crew should avoid extended flight in icing conditions with the slats
extended.
FLAPS 1............................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 1................................................................................................................................SELECT
‐ FLAPS 1 should be selected more than 3 NM before the Final Descent Point.
‐ Check deceleration toward "S" speed.
‐ For decelerated approaches, the aircraft must reach or be established on the final descent with
FLAPS 1 and "S" speed at or above 2 000 ft AGL.
‐ If the aircraft does not decelerate on the flight path or aircraft speed is significantly higher than
"S" speed, extend the landing gear in order to slow down. The use of speedbrakes is possible.
The flight crew should be aware that the use of speedbrakes causes an increase in VLS.
TCAS Mode selector......................................................................................................TA or TA/RA
‐ FAA recommends to select TA only mode:
• In case of known nearby traffic which is in visual contact
• At particular airports and during particular procedures identified by an Operator as having
a significant potential for unwanted or inappropriate resolution advisories (closely spaced
parallel runways, converging runway, low terrain along the final approach, etc.).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-B-00014500.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: A321

AT GREEN DOT SPEED


CAUTION The flight crew should avoid extended flight in icing conditions with the slats
extended.
FLAPS 1............................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 1................................................................................................................................SELECT
‐ At high weights, if the green dot speed is close to VFE NEXT, the flight crew may select a lower
speed.
‐ FLAPS 1 should be selected more than 3 NM before the Final Descent Point.
‐ Check deceleration toward "S" speed.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B P 4/12
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

‐ For decelerated approaches, the aircraft must reach or be established on the final descent with
FLAPS 1 and "S" speed at or above 2 000 ft AGL.
‐ If the aircraft does not decelerate on the flight path or aircraft speed is significantly higher than
"S" speed, extend the landing gear in order to slow down. The use of speedbrakes is possible.
The flight crew should be aware that the use of speedbrakes causes an increase in VLS.
TCAS Mode selector......................................................................................................TA or TA/RA
‐ FAA recommends to select TA only mode:
• In case of known nearby traffic which is in visual contact
• At particular airports and during particular procedures identified by an Operator as having
a significant potential for unwanted or inappropriate resolution advisories (closely spaced
parallel runways, converging runway, low terrain along the final approach, etc.).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-B-00014499.0001001 / 09 MAR 15
Applicable to: ALL

AT 2 000 FT AGL MINIMUM


FLAPS 2............................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 2................................................................................................................................SELECT
‐ Check deceleration toward "F" speed.
‐ For ILS / MLS  / GLS  and approaches using FLS  , if the aircraft intercepts the flight
path below 2 000 ft AGL, select FLAPS 2 at one dot below the flight path.
‐ If the aircraft speed is significantly higher than "F" speed on the flight path, or the aircraft does
not decelerate on the flight path, extend the landing gear in order to slow down the aircraft. The
use of speed brakes is not recommended.
‐ When the speed brakes are deployed, extending the flaps beyond FLAPS 1 may induce a
slight roll movement, and in calm conditions a small lateral control asymmetry may remain until
disturbed by a control input or by an atmospheric disturbance.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-B-00014498.0001001 / 05 MAR 18
Applicable to: ALL

WHEN FLAPS ARE AT 2


L/G DOWN ............................................................................................................................ORDER
L/G lever...................................................................................................................SELECT DOWN
AUTO BRK ........................................................................................................................CONFIRM
‐ If the runway conditions have changed from the approach briefing, consider another braking
mode.
GROUND SPOILERS ................................................................................................................ARM

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B P 5/12
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

EXTERIOR LIGHTS
NOSE sw...................................................................................................................................T.O
RWY TURN OFF sw................................................................................................................. ON
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-B-00014497.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: A319 CEO

WHEN LANDING GEAR IS DOWN


FLAPS 3.................................................................................................................................ORDER
FLAPS 3................................................................................................................................SELECT
ECAM WHEEL SD page ...................................................................................................... CHECK
‐ WHEEL SD page appears below 15 500 ft when landing gear is extended.
‐ Check for three green indications on the landing gear indicator panel. At least one green triangle
on each landing gear strut on the WHEEL SD page is sufficient to indicate that the landing gear
is downlocked. Rely also on the “LDG GEAR DN” green LDG MEMO message to confirm that
the landing gear is downlocked.
 If residual pressure is indicated on the triple indicator:
RESIDUAL BRAKING PROC........................................................................................... APPLY
FLAPS FULL.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS FULL......................................................................................................................... SELECT
‐ Retract the speed brakes before selecting FLAPS FULL to prevent a pitch down when the
speed brakes automatically retract.
‐ Check deceleration towards VAPP.
‐ Check correct TO waypoint on the ND.
A/THR........................................................................................CHECK IN SPEED MODE OR OFF
WING ANTI-ICE pb-sw................................................................................................................OFF
‐ Switch the WING ANTI ICE pb-sw to ON, only in severe icing conditions.
SLIDING TABLE.......................................................................................................................STOW
ALL EFB (with no mounted equipment).................................................................................. STOW
LDG MEMO...........................................................................................................CHECK NO BLUE
CABIN REPORT................................................................................................................. RECEIVE
CABIN CREW........................................................................................................................ ADVISE
LANDING CHECKLIST................................................................................................... COMPLETE

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B P 6/12
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

FLIGHT PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................MONITOR
‐ The PF announces any FMA modification.
‐ The PM calls out, if:
• The speed goes lower than the speed target -5 kt , or greater than the speed target +10 kt
• The pitch attitude goes lower than -2.5 °, or greater than +10 ° nose up
• The bank angle becomes greater than 7 °
• The descent rate becomes greater than 1 000 ft/min
‐ Following PM flight parameter exceedance callout, the suitable PF response will be:
• Acknowledge the PM callout, for proper crew coordination purposes
• Take immediate corrective action to control the exceeded parameter back into the defined
stabilized conditions
• Assess whether stabilized conditions will be recovered early enough prior to landing,
otherwise initiate a go-around.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-B-00014497.0003001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: A321 CEO

WHEN LANDING GEAR IS DOWN


FLAPS 3.................................................................................................................................ORDER
FLAPS 3................................................................................................................................SELECT
‐ Retract the speed brakes before selecting FLAPS 3 to prevent a pitch down when the speed
brakes automatically retract.
ECAM WHEEL SD page ...................................................................................................... CHECK
‐ WHEEL SD page appears below 15 500 ft when landing gear is extended.
‐ Check for three green indications on the landing gear indicator panel. At least one green triangle
on each landing gear strut on the WHEEL SD page is sufficient to indicate that the landing gear
is downlocked. Rely also on the “LDG GEAR DN” green LDG MEMO message to confirm that
the landing gear is downlocked.
 If residual pressure is indicated on the triple indicator:
RESIDUAL BRAKING PROC........................................................................................... APPLY
FLAPS FULL.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS FULL......................................................................................................................... SELECT
‐ Check deceleration towards VAPP.
‐ Check correct TO waypoint on the ND.
A/THR........................................................................................CHECK IN SPEED MODE OR OFF

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B P 7/12
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

WING ANTI-ICE pb-sw................................................................................................................OFF


‐ Switch the WING ANTI ICE pb-sw to ON, only in severe icing conditions.
SLIDING TABLE.......................................................................................................................STOW
ALL EFB (with no mounted equipment).................................................................................. STOW
LDG MEMO...........................................................................................................CHECK NO BLUE
CABIN REPORT................................................................................................................. RECEIVE
CABIN CREW........................................................................................................................ ADVISE
LANDING CHECKLIST................................................................................................... COMPLETE
FLIGHT PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................MONITOR
‐ The PF announces any FMA modification.
‐ The PM calls out, if:
• The speed goes lower than the speed target -5 kt , or greater than the speed target +10 kt
• The pitch attitude goes lower than -2.5 °, or greater than +7.5 ° nose up
• The bank angle becomes greater than 7 °
• The descent rate becomes greater than 1 000 ft/min
‐ Following PM flight parameter exceedance callout, the suitable PF response will be:
• Acknowledge the PM callout, for proper crew coordination purposes
• Take immediate corrective action to control the exceeded parameter back into the defined
stabilized conditions
• Assess whether stabilized conditions will be recovered early enough prior to landing,
otherwise initiate a go-around.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-B-00014497.0002001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: A320

WHEN LANDING GEAR IS DOWN


FLAPS 3.................................................................................................................................ORDER
FLAPS 3................................................................................................................................SELECT
ECAM WHEEL SD page ...................................................................................................... CHECK
‐ WHEEL SD page appears below 15 500 ft when landing gear is extended.
‐ Check for three green indications on the landing gear indicator panel. At least one green triangle
on each landing gear strut on the WHEEL SD page is sufficient to indicate that the landing gear
is downlocked. Rely also on the “LDG GEAR DN” green LDG MEMO message to confirm that
the landing gear is downlocked.
 If residual pressure is indicated on the triple indicator:
RESIDUAL BRAKING PROC........................................................................................... APPLY
‐ Due to the accomplishment of the alternate braking functional test after the landing gear is
downlocked, brief brake pressure indications may be observed on BRAKES PRESS.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B P 8/12
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

FLAPS FULL.......................................................................................................................... ORDER


FLAPS FULL......................................................................................................................... SELECT
‐ Retract the speed brakes before selecting FLAPS FULL to prevent a pitch down when the
speed brakes automatically retract.
‐ Check deceleration towards VAPP.
‐ Check correct TO waypoint on the ND.
A/THR........................................................................................CHECK IN SPEED MODE OR OFF
WING ANTI-ICE pb-sw................................................................................................................OFF
‐ Switch the WING ANTI ICE pb-sw to ON, only in severe icing conditions.
SLIDING TABLE.......................................................................................................................STOW
ALL EFB (with no mounted equipment).................................................................................. STOW
LDG MEMO...........................................................................................................CHECK NO BLUE
CABIN REPORT................................................................................................................. RECEIVE
CABIN CREW........................................................................................................................ ADVISE
LANDING CHECKLIST................................................................................................... COMPLETE
FLIGHT PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................MONITOR
‐ The PF announces any FMA modification.
‐ The PM calls out, if:
• The speed goes lower than the speed target -5 kt , or greater than the speed target +10 kt
• The pitch attitude goes lower than -2.5 °, or greater than +10 ° nose up
• The bank angle becomes greater than 7 °
• The descent rate becomes greater than 1 000 ft/min
‐ Following PM flight parameter exceedance callout, the suitable PF response will be:
• Acknowledge the PM callout, for proper crew coordination purposes
• Take immediate corrective action to control the exceeded parameter back into the defined
stabilized conditions
• Assess whether stabilized conditions will be recovered early enough prior to landing,
otherwise initiate a go-around.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-B-00014497.0006001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: A321/319 NEO

WHEN LANDING GEAR IS DOWN


FLAPS 3.................................................................................................................................ORDER
FLAPS 3................................................................................................................................SELECT
‐ Retract the speed brakes before selecting FLAPS 3 to prevent a pitch down when the speed
brakes automatically retract.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B P 9/12
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

ECAM WHEEL SD page ...................................................................................................... CHECK


‐ WHEEL SD page appears below 15 500 ft when landing gear is extended.
‐ Check for three green indications on the landing gear indicator panel. At least one green triangle
on each landing gear strut on the WHEEL SD page is sufficient to indicate that the landing gear
is downlocked. Rely also on the “LDG GEAR DN” green LDG MEMO message to confirm that
the landing gear is downlocked.
 If residual pressure is indicated on the triple indicator:
RESIDUAL BRAKING PROC........................................................................................... APPLY
‐ Due to the accomplishment of the alternate braking functional test after the landing gear is
downlocked, brief brake pressure indications may be observed on BRAKES PRESS.
FLAPS FULL.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS FULL......................................................................................................................... SELECT
‐ Check deceleration towards VAPP.
‐ Check correct TO waypoint on the ND.
A/THR........................................................................................CHECK IN SPEED MODE OR OFF
WING ANTI-ICE pb-sw................................................................................................................OFF
‐ Switch the WING ANTI ICE pb-sw to ON, only in severe icing conditions.
SLIDING TABLE.......................................................................................................................STOW
ALL EFB (with no mounted equipment).................................................................................. STOW
LDG MEMO...........................................................................................................CHECK NO BLUE
CABIN REPORT................................................................................................................. RECEIVE
CABIN CREW........................................................................................................................ ADVISE
LANDING CHECKLIST................................................................................................... COMPLETE

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B P 10/12
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

FLIGHT PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................MONITOR
‐ The PF announces any FMA modification.
‐ The PM calls out, if:
• The speed goes lower than the speed target -5 kt , or greater than the speed target +10 kt
• The pitch attitude goes lower than -2.5 °, or greater than +7.5 ° nose up
• The bank angle becomes greater than 7 °
• The descent rate becomes greater than 1 000 ft/min
‐ Following PM flight parameter exceedance callout, the suitable PF response will be:
• Acknowledge the PM callout, for proper crew coordination purposes
• Take immediate corrective action to control the exceeded parameter back into the defined
stabilized conditions
• Assess whether stabilized conditions will be recovered early enough prior to landing,
otherwise initiate a go-around.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B P 11/12
←B→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B-B-00014495.0001001 / 29 MAY 13


Applicable to: ALL

PATTERN (DECELERATED)

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-B P 12/12
←B 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Aircraft Guidance Management

APPROACH USING LOC G/S GUIDANCE


Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-A-00014508.0001001 / 29 MAY 13

GENERAL
The following items are to be performed in addition to previous SOP chapters for ILS / MLS  /
GLS  approach.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-A-00020896.0001001 / 20 MAR 17

DESCENT PREPARATION
APPROACH MINIMUM..................................................................................................DETERMINE
‐ For CATII, CATIII approaches, always choose the lowest achievable minimum. The approach
minimum is limited by:
• Crew qualification
• Airline Operating Manual requirement
• Aircraft technical status
• Airport status
‐ For CATIII with no DH, the flight crew should enter "NO" in the DH field of the MCDU to avoid
false "HUNDRED ABOVE" or "MINIMUM" auto callouts which would not be applicable.
APPROACH BRIEFING.................................................................................................... PERFORM
For CATII, CATIII approaches, review the following items on top of the usual briefing:
‐ Task sharing and callouts
‐ Management of degraded guidance
‐ Low visibility procedures at the airport

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 1/28
A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-A-00014509.0001001 / 09 FEB 16

INITIAL/INTERMEDIATE APPROACH
APPR pb on FCU................................................................................................................... PRESS
‐ Press the APPR pb when:
• Cleared for the approach
• On the intercept trajectory for the final approach course
• LOC deviation is available.
This arms the LOC and G/S modes.
Note: In NAV mode, the aircraft may leave the F-PLN to capture the LOC.
‐ LOC and/or G/S capture modes will engage no sooner than 3 s after being armed.
‐ ICAO defines the envelope where the quality of the G/S signal ensures a normal capture. This
envelope is within 10 NM, ±8 ° of the centerline of the ILS glide path and up to 1.75 θ and down
to 0.3 θ (θ = nominal glide path angle). When arming the approach well outside of the normal
G/S capture envelope, a spurious G/S* engagement may occur due to a wrong G/S deviation
signal. Whenever the pilot notices the pitch movement, or the spurious G/S*, or the trajectory
deviation, he will immediately disconnect the AP, if engaged, to re-establish a normal attitude
and will disengage APPR mode. It is then recommended to arm/rearm APPR (ILS) mode within
the normal capture zone.
BOTH APs........................................................................................................................... ENGAGE
‐ When APPR mode is selected, AP1 and AP2 should be engaged.
‐ Above 5 000 ft AGL, the FMA displays CAT 1.
‐ Below 5 000 ft AGL, the FMA displays the correct approach capability for the intended
approach.
LOC.......................................................................................................................... CHECK ARMED
G/S........................................................................................................................... CHECK ARMED
LOC CAPTURE..................................................................................................................MONITOR
G/S CAPTURE...................................................................................................................MONITOR
GO AROUND ALTITUDE............................................................................................................ SET
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-A-00014510.0002001 / 04 NOV 20

GLIDE INTERCEPTION FROM ABOVE


The following procedure must only be applied when established on the localizer. The flight crew
must react without delay to meet the stabilization criteria.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 2/28
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

In order to get the best rate of descent when cleared by ATC and below the limiting speeds, the
flight crew should lower the landing gear and select flaps as required (at least CONF 2 should be
selected to ensure that the aircraft speed will not increase).
 If above the glideslope:
APPR MODE ........................................................................................ ARM / CHECK ARMED
LOC...............................................................................................................CHECK ENGAGED
FCU ALTITUDE............................................................................. SET ABOVE A/C ALTITUDE
V/S MODE...................................................................................................................... SELECT
‐ Select V/S 1 500 ft/min initially. V/S in excess of 2 000 ft/min will result in the speed
increasing towards VFE.
‐ When reaching VFE, the AP maintains VFE and reduces the V/S without MODE
REVERSION.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-A-00014511.0001001 / 04 JUL 17

FINAL APPROACH
FLIGHT PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................MONITOR
‐ The PM calls out if excessive deviation occurs:
• LOC: ½ dot
• GLIDE: ½ dot
Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-90 Approach
AT 350 ft RA
LAND mode................................................................................... CHECK ENGAGED/ANNOUNCE
If no LAND mode, autoland is not authorized.
FOR CAT I, CAT II, CAT III WITH DH APPROACH
AT ENTERED MINIMUM +100 ft
ONE HUNDRED ABOVE...............................................................MONITOR OR ANNOUNCE
AT ENTERED MINIMUM
MINIMUM....................................................................................... MONITOR OR ANNOUNCE
Below minimum, the visual references must be the primary reference until landing.
For more information regarding transition to visual references, Refer to
FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-250 Transition to Visual References.
 If visual references are sufficient:
CONTINUE.......................................................................................................ANNOUNCE

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 3/28
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

AP.........................................................................................................................AS RQRD
For Minimum Use Height of the AP Refer to LIM-AFS-10 Flight Management Function
For Manual Landing and Autoland procedure Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-19 Landing - Flare
 If visual references are not sufficient:
GO AROUND................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
Initiate a go around.
FOR CAT III WITHOUT DH APPROACH
At 100 ft (Alert Height) if no failure
CONTINUE............................................................................................................. ANNOUNCE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-A-00021062.0002001 / 26 NOV 19

MANAGEMENT OF DEGRADED GUIDANCE


EARLY/UNTIMELY FLARE MODE ENGAGEMENT
‐ Perform a go around (thrust levers set to TOGA), or
‐ Disconnect AP, set both FDs to OFF and continue the approach using raw data or external
visual references.
In association to an early/untimely FLARE mode engagement on the FMA, the following effects
may occur:
‐ On the Primary Flight Display (PFD):
• The RA height indication may be frozen at a positive or negative value,
• Discrepancies between both PFDs may happen on the following indications:
▪ RA heights,
▪ FD orders,
▪ FMA indications when both APs are engaged.
‐ Warnings and/or Callouts:
• Untimely activation of the AUTOLAND warning light. Refer to DSC-22_30-30 Autoland
Warning,
• Untimely Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) alerts,
• Untimely or absence of “RETARD" callout,
• Untimely L/G GEAR NOT DOWN ECAM warning,
• Absence or interruption of RA automatic callout (height announcement),
‐ On the System Display (SD): A pulsing cabin differential pressure advisory may appear on
the ECAM - CAB PRESS PAGE
Note: This ECAM advisory has no consequence on the real cabin pressure.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 4/28
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

FOR CAT II, CAT III OPERATIONS


 In the case of:
‐ Amber caution (single chime), or
‐ Landing capability degradation.
Above 1000 ft AGL :
ECAM / QRH PROCEDURE................................................................................ COMPLETE
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT............................................................................................CHECK
Refer to QRH/OPS Required Equipment for CAT2 and CAT3
APPROACH AND LANDING CAPABILITY................................................................. CHECK
If required:
RVR..............................................................................................................................CHECK
DH...............................................................................................................................ADJUST
BRIEFING................................................................................................................ CONFIRM
 If the flight crew does not complete all the above actions at 1 000 ft:
GO AROUND................................................................................................... PERFORM
Below 1000 ft AGL :
 If external visual references are not sufficient:
GO AROUND................................................................................................... PERFORM
Below 100 ft (Alert Height) for CAT 3 DUAL:
Approach may be continued unless autoland light comes on.
 In the case of Autoland warning light:
 Visual references not sufficient:
GO AROUND................................................................................................... PERFORM
 Visual references sufficient:
Approach may be continued manually

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 5/28
←A 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

APPROACH USING FINAL APP GUIDANCE


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-C-00014521.0002001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

GENERAL
The following items are to be performed in addition to previous SOP chapters in the following
cases:
‐ RNAV(GNSS) approaches with LNAV and LNAV/VNAV minima
‐ Conventional approaches based on VOR or NDB using FINAL APP guidance.

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-C-00014522.0003001 / 09 SEP 14


Applicable to: ALL

AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT
For RNAV(GNSS) approaches, Refer to PRO-SPO-51 RNP APCH / RNAV(GNSS) - Required
RNP APCH Equipment
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-C-00015860.0001001 / 09 SEP 14
Applicable to: ALL

FLIGHT PREPARATION
For RNAV(GNSS) approaches, GPS PRIMARY availability should be confirmed.
Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-02 GPS PRIMARY Availability (If Installed)

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 6/28
B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-C-00014524.0002001 / 08 AUG 17


Applicable to: ALL

DESCENT PREPARATION
WEATHER AND LANDING INFORMATION.........................................................................OBTAIN
‐ The FMS vertical profile does not take into account the effect of low OAT. Therefore, vertical
managed guidance:
• Must not be used when the actual OAT is below the minimum temperature indicated on the
approach chart or defined by the Operator, or
• May not be used when temperature corrections are required (FINAL APP mode may not
engage).
‐ For RNAV (GNSS) approach with LNAV VNAV minima, use of QNH from a remote station is
prohibited.
F-PLN A page........................................................................................................................ CHECK
‐ If a TOO STEEP PATH is displayed after the Final Descent Point (FDP), do not use FINAL APP
guidance for approach. Use NAV FPA, TRK FPA or FLS  for approach.
‐ 0.1 degree of difference between the MCDU and the charted final vertical path is acceptable
‐ 1 degree of difference between the MCDU and the charted final lateral track is acceptable
Note: A higher lateral track value can be acceptable if the navigation database has been
validated to exclude potential coding error.
‐ 3 degree of difference between the MCDU and the charted final lateral track is acceptable for
conventional radio NAVAID approach.
PROG page.....................................................................................................................COMPLETE
‐ Insert the reference RWY threshold in the BRG/DIST field for position monitoring during
approach.
GO AROUND STRATEGY................................................................................................... REVIEW
‐ The briefing should include a review of the "Management of Degraded Navigation" chapter.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-C-00014525.0003001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: ALL

DESCENT
At 10 000 ft:

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 7/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

NAV ACCURACY................................................................................................................... CHECK


‐ If NAV accuracy is LOW, use TRK FPA mode for approach (Refer to APPR using FPA
guidance).
 For RNAV(GNSS) approach:
GPS PRIMARY................................................................................................................ CHECK
‐ GPS PRIMARY must be available on at least 1 FMS.
BARO REF...................................................................................................................................SET
‐ The vertical guidance requires a precise baro setting. The maximum acceptable discrepancy
between altimeters is 100 ft.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-C-00014526.0002001 / 08 AUG 17
Applicable to: ALL

INITIAL/INTERMEDIATE/FINAL APPROACH
POSITION.......................................................................................................................... MONITOR
‐ Check that ATC clearances allow the aircraft to fly through the capture area of vertical profile.
After a radar vectoring, consider a DIR TO RDL IN to sequence the F-PLN.
APPR pb on FCU ..................................................................................................................PRESS
Press the APPR pb when all of the following conditions are satisfied:
‐ The aircraft is cleared for approach
‐ TO waypoint is the Final Descent Point.
APP NAV.......................................................................................... CHECK ARMED or ENGAGED
FINAL....................................................................................................................... CHECK ARMED
‐ Check that the V/DEV scale is displayed on the PFD.
‐ At the Final Descent Point, a blue arrow on ND indicates that FINAL APP engagement
conditions are met.
At the Final Descent Point :
FINAL APP..........................................................................................................CHECK ENGAGED
GO AROUND ALTITUDE............................................................................................................ SET
FLIGHT PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................MONITOR
‐ Monitor XTK error on ND.
‐ Monitor V/DEV on PFD.
‐ Crosscheck distances versus altitudes as published on the charts.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 8/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

‐ If approaching on a conventional radio NAVAID procedure, monitor the lateral and vertical
guidance using raw data.
‐ The PM calls out if excessive deviation occurs:
• XTK > 0.1 NM
• V/DEV > ½ dot
L2 On the vertical scale, one dot corresponds to 100 ft. Thus ½ dot is 50 ft.
L1 Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-90 Approach
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-C-00015015.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

AT ENTERED MINIMUM +100 FT


ONE HUNDRED ABOVE.......................................................................MONITOR OR ANNOUNCE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-C-00014527.0008001 / 04 JUL 17
Applicable to: ALL

AT ENTERED MINIMUM
MINIMUM...............................................................................................MONITOR OR ANNOUNCE
Below minimum, the visual references must be the primary references until landing.
For more information regarding transition to visual references, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-250
Transition to Visual References.
 If visual references are sufficient:
CONTINUE...............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
At the latest at the MAP or Minimum Use Height of the AP (whichever occurs first):
AP .........................................................................................................................................OFF
‐ For Minimum Use Height of the AP, Refer to LIM-AFS-10 Autopilot Function
‐ At minimum -50 ft, if the AP is still engaged, the message DISCONNECT AP FOR LDG
pulses on the FMA to remind the flight crew that automatic landing is not available.
FD ............................................................................................................................... AS RQRD
CAUTION ‐ From minima down to the MAP the FD provides an additional guidance.
The FD must be switched off if the guidance is not relevant or not followed.
‐ After the MAP, disregard the FD as it reverts to HDG V/S.
 If visual references are not sufficient:
GO AROUND...........................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
‐ Initiate a go around.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 9/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-C-00014528.0002001 / 26 NOV 19


Applicable to: ALL

MANAGEMENT OF DEGRADED NAVIGATION


 For VOR and NDB approaches, be prepared to continue the approach with reference to
appropriate raw data by reverting to:
‐ NAV FPA, if the vertical guidance is not satisfactory
‐ TRK FPA, if the lateral guidance is not satisfactory.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 12/28
←B→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

 For RNAV(GNSS) approaches with LNAV minima:


‐ Use the appropriate remaining AP/FD in the following cases:
• GPS PRIMARY LOST on one ND
• NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD on one FMGS.
‐ Discontinue the approach in the following cases, if external visual references are not
sufficient to proceed visually:
• GPS PRIMARY LOST on both NDs
• XTK > 0.3 NM
• NAV FM/GPS POS DISAGREE on ECAM
• NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD on both FMGS.
‐ Be prepared to continue the approach by reverting to NAV FPA, if the vertical guidance is
not satisfactory.
 For RNAV(GNSS) approaches with LNAV/VNAV minima:
‐ Use the appropriate remaining AP/FD in the following cases:
• GPS PRIMARY LOST on one ND
• NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD on one FMGS.
‐ Discontinue the approach in the following cases, if external visual references are not
sufficient to proceed visually:
• GPS PRIMARY LOST on both NDs
• XTK > 0.3 NM
• NAV FM/GPS POS DISAGREE on ECAM
• NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD on both FMGS.
‐ Discontinue the approach in the case of deviation of 75 ft below the vertical path (V/DEV>¾
dot).

APPROACH USING FINAL APP GUIDANCE FOR RNAV(RNP)


Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-D-00014663.0002001 / 29 MAY 13

GENERAL
The following items are to be performed in addition to previous SOP chapters in case of
RNAV(RNP) approaches.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 13/28
← B to C → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

The procedures of the paragraph below are generic guidelines for RNAV(RNP) approaches.
These procedures may be tailored by the airline for specific airfields according to their OPS
approval.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-D-00014664.0002001 / 29 MAY 13

AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT
Refer to PRO-SPO-51 RNP AR OPERATIONS
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-D-00014677.0002001 / 29 MAY 13

FLIGHT PREPARATION
Use a prediction tool to check the GPS PRIMARY availability for the estimated time of operation. It
ensures that the RNP criteria will be met during approach. This prediction should take into account
the terrain environment.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-D-00014666.0002001 / 28 MAY 20

DESCENT PREPARATION
WEATHER AND LANDING INFORMATION.........................................................................OBTAIN
‐ The FMS vertical profile does not take into account the effect of low OAT. Therefore, vertical
managed guidance:
• Must not be used when the actual OAT is below the minimum temperature indicated on the
approach chart or defined by the Operator, or
• May not be used when temperature corrections are required (FINAL APP mode may not
engage).
‐ Verify that wind is within limits
‐ Use of QNH from a remote station is prohibited.
F-PLN A page........................................................................................................................ CHECK
If a TOO STEEP PATH is displayed after the FDP, FINAL APP guidance cannot be used. Select
another approach.
PROG page.....................................................................................................................COMPLETE
‐ Insert the reference waypoint or RWY threshold in the BRG/DIST field for position monitoring
during approach.
‐ Check/Insert the RNP value in the 6L field.
GO AROUND STRATEGY................................................................................................... REVIEW
‐ The briefing should include a review of the "Management of Degraded Navigation" chapter.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 14/28
←C→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-D-00014667.0002001 / 04 DEC 18

DESCENT
GPS PRIMARY ON BOTH FMS............................................................................................CHECK
‐ For RNAV(RNP) approaches, GPS PRIMARY must be available on both FMS (GPS PRIMARY
LOST not displayed on NDs).
GPS 1+2............................................................................................................CHECK both in NAV
‐ Both GPS must be in NAV on the GPS MONITOR Page.
‐ Both GPS and both FMS must be available before the IAF. Thus, if one FMS is inoperative or if
one GPS is not in NAV before the IAF, RNAV(RNP) is not allowed.
TERR on ND................................................................................................................................. ON
Unless weather radar is required on one side, the flight crew selects terrain on both NDs.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-D-00014668.0003001 / 28 MAY 20

INITIAL / INTERMEDIATE / FINAL APPROACH


BARO REF/ALTIMETER........................................................................................................ CHECK
‐ The vertical guidance requires a precise baro setting. The maximum acceptable discrepancy
between altimeters is 100 ft.
FD or AP FD ................................................................................................ USE FOR APPROACH
‐ The use of FD or AP FD provides the required navigation accuracy. Refer to Use of NAV and
Final APP Modes for Approach
APPR pb on FCU ..................................................................................................................PRESS
Press the APPR pb when all of the following conditions are satisfied:
‐ The aircraft is cleared for approach
‐ TO waypoint is the Final Descent Point.
APP NAV .........................................................................................CHECK ARMED or ENGAGED
FINAL....................................................................................................................... CHECK ARMED
‐ Check that the V/DEV scale is displayed on the PFD.
‐ At the VIP, a blue arrow on ND indicates that FINAL APP engagement conditions are met.
At the Final Descent Point :
FINAL APP .........................................................................................................CHECK ENGAGED
GO AROUND ALTITUDE............................................................................................................ SET

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 15/28
←C→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

FLIGHT PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................MONITOR
‐ Monitor V/DEV on PFD.
‐ Monitor XTK on ND.
‐ Crosscheck distances versus altitudes as published on the charts.
‐ The PM calls out if excessive deviation occurs:
• XTK reaches 0.1 NM
• V/DEV reaches ½ dot.
L2 On the vertical scale, one dot corresponds to 100 ft. Thus ½ dot is 50 ft.
L1 Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP 90 Flight Parameters in Approach
‐ Go-around must be initiated if excessive deviation occurs:
• XTK reaches 1 RNP.
• V/DEV reaches ¾ dot.
L2 On the vertical scale, one dot corresponds to 100 ft. Thus ¾dotis75 ft.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-D-00015016.0001001 / 29 MAY 13

AT ENTERED MINIMUM +100 FT


ONE HUNDRED ABOVE.......................................................................MONITOR OR ANNOUNCE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-D-00014669.0009001 / 20 MAR 17

AT ENTERED MINIMUM
MINIMUM................................................................................................. MONITOR or ANNOUNCE
Below minimum, the visual references must be the primary reference until landing.
 If visual references are sufficient:
CONTINUE...............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
At the latest at the MAP or Minimum Use Height of the AP (whichever occurs first):
AP .........................................................................................................................................OFF
‐ For Minimum Use Height of the AP, Refer to LIM-AFS-10 Autopilot Function
FD ............................................................................................................................... AS RQRD
CAUTION ‐ From minima down to the MAP the FD provides an additional guidance.
The FD must be switched off if the guidance is not relevant or not followed.
‐ After the MAP, disregard the FD as it reverts to HDG V/S.
 If visual references are not sufficient:
GO AROUND...........................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
‐ Initiate a go around.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 16/28
←C→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-D-00014670.0004001 / 29 MAY 13

ENGINE FAILURE
If one engine fails in approach, the AP must be disconnected. The approach may be continued
with FD engaged.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-D-00014671.0003001 / 25 JAN 17

MANAGEMENT OF DEGRADED NAVIGATION


The approach may be continued in case of single failure of:
‐ GPS (MMR)
‐ FMGS
‐ EFIS DU
‐ MCDU
‐ AP
Discontinue the approach in the following cases:
‐ FINAL APP does not engage
‐ GPS PRIMARY LOST on both NDs
‐ Dual NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD
‐ FM/GPS POSITION DISAGREE
‐ FMS1/FMS2 POS DIFF
‐ Dual loss of FMGC or dual loss of FINAL APP mode
‐ Loss of GPWS TERRAIN function in case of inconsistencies affecting obstacles or terrain
computation
‐ NAV ALT DISCREPANCY

APPROACH USING FPA GUIDANCE


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-E-00014561.0002001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

GENERAL
The following items are to be performed in addition to previous SOP chapters in the following
cases:
‐ RNAV(GNSS) approaches using mixed NAV FPA guidance with LNAV minima only
‐ Conventional approaches based on VOR and NDB using selected TRK FPA or mixed NAV FPA
guidance
‐ ILS G/S OUT, LOC ONLY and back course localizer approaches.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 17/28
← C to D → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

The approach is flown in TRK FPA when:


‐ The approach is not stored in the database or
‐ NAV accuracy is LOW.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-E-00014560.0003001 / 09 SEP 14
Applicable to: ALL

AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT
For RNAV(GNSS) approaches, Refer to PRO-SPO-51 RNP APCH / RNAV(GNSS) - Required
RNP APCH Equipment
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-E-00015861.0001001 / 09 SEP 14
Applicable to: ALL

FLIGHT PREPARATION
For RNAV(GNSS) approaches, GPS PRIMARY availability should be confirmed.
Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-02 GPS PRIMARY Availability (If Installed)
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-E-00014558.0002001 / 04 JUN 19
Applicable to: ALL

DESCENT PREPARATION
F-PLN A page........................................................................................................................ CHECK
‐ If a TOO STEEP PATH message is displayed after the Final Descent Point (FDP), disregard the
V/DEV or yoyo information on the PFD.
‐ For approaches using NAV FPA:
• 1 degree of difference between the MCDU and the charted final lateral track is acceptable.
Note: A higher lateral track value can be acceptable if the navigation database has been
validated to exclude potential coding error.
• 3 degree of difference between the MCDU and the charted final lateral track is acceptable for
conventional radio NAVAID approach.
‐ In all other cases, use TRK FPA mode for approach.
PROG page.....................................................................................................................COMPLETE
‐ Insert the reference RWY threshold in the BRG/DIST field for position monitoring during
approach.
GO AROUND STRATEGY................................................................................................... REVIEW
‐ The briefing should include a review of the "Management of Degraded Navigation" chapter.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 18/28
←D→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-E-00014557.0003001 / 03 MAR 14


Applicable to: ALL

DESCENT
At 10 000 ft:
NAV ACCURACY................................................................................................................... CHECK
‐ If NAV accuracy is LOW, use TRK mode for approach.
 For RNAV(GNSS) approach:
GPS PRIMARY................................................................................................................ CHECK
‐ GPS PRIMARY must be available on at least 1 FMS.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-E-00014556.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

INITIAL/INTERMEDIATE/FINAL APPROACH
LATERAL GUIDANCE MODE....................................................................... SET FOR APPROACH
‐ Arm NAV or LOC mode as appropriate.
 For LOC ONLY and ILS G/S OUT:
LOC pb-sw ...................................................................................................................... PRESS
‐ Press the LOC pb-sw when cleared for approach and on the intercept trajectory for the final
approach course.
Note: In NAV mode, the aircraft may leave the F-PLN to capture the LOC.

LOC .................................................................................................................. CHECK ARMED


CAUTION Do not press the APPR pb
 For back course localizer approaches:
TRK FPA MODE.....................................................................................USE FOR APPROACH
‐ Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-190-GUI Back Course Localizer Approach.
LATERAL PATH............................................................................................................. INTERCEPT
‐ Monitor NAV or LOC engagement as appropriate.
TRK FPA pb (Bird)................................................................................................................SELECT
FPA FOR FINAL APPROACH.....................................................................................................SET
At 0.3 nm from the Final Descent Point:
FPA selector ............................................................................................................................. PULL

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 19/28
←D→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

FPA MODE..........................................................................................................CHECK ENGAGED


‐ Check NAV FPA, TRK FPA or LOC FPA is engaged.
POSITION/FLIGHT PATH ................................................................................. MONITOR/ADJUST
GO AROUND ALTITUDE............................................................................................................ SET
‐ Set when below the go around altitude to avoid unexpected altitude capture.
FLIGHT PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................MONITOR
‐ Crosscheck distances versus altitudes as published on the charts.
‐ If approaching on a conventional radio NAVAID procedure, monitor the lateral and vertical
guidance using raw data.
‐ For approaches using NAV FPA, monitor XTK error on ND to check the lateral guidance.
‐ The PM calls out if excessive lateral deviation occurs:
• Approach using NAV MODE: XTK > 0.1 NM
• Approach using LOC MODE: LOC ½ dot
• Approach using TRK MODE:
▪ VOR: ½ dot or 2.5 °
▪ NDB: 5 °
Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-90 Flight Parameters in Approach
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-E-00015017.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

AT ENTERED MINIMUM +100 FT


ONE HUNDRED ABOVE.......................................................................MONITOR OR ANNOUNCE

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 20/28
←D→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-E-00014555.0013001 / 04 JUL 17


Applicable to: ALL

AT ENTERED MINIMUM
MINIMUM...............................................................................................MONITOR OR ANNOUNCE
Below minimum, the visual references must be the primary references until landing.
For more information regarding transition to visual references, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-250
Transition to Visual References.
 If visual references are sufficient:
CONTINUE...............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
AP .........................................................................................................................................OFF
‐ At minimum -50 ft, if the AP is still engaged, the message DISCONNECT AP FOR LDG
pulses on the FMA to remind the flight crew that automatic landing is not available.
FD .........................................................................................................................................OFF
‐ The PF orders the PM to set both FDs OFF.
RUNWAY TRACK....................................................................................................CHECK/SET
‐ If needed, the PF orders the PM to set the runway track.
 If visual references are not sufficient:
GO AROUND...........................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
‐ Initiate a go around.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-E-00014554.0002001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: ALL

MANAGEMENT OF DEGRADED NAVIGATION


 For VOR and NDB approaches in NAV FPA, if lateral guidance is not satisfactory:
‐ Be prepared to continue the approach with reference to appropriate raw data by reverting to
TRK FPA.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 21/28
←D→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

 For RNAV(GNSS) approaches, with LNAV minima:


‐ Use the appropriate remaining AP FD in the following cases:
• GPS PRIMARY LOST on one ND
• NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD on one FMGS
‐ Discontinue the approach in the following cases, if external visual references are not
sufficient to proceed visually:
• GPS PRIMARY LOST on both NDs
• XTK > 0.3 NM
• NAV FM/GPS POS DISAGREE on ECAM
• NAV ACCUR DOWNGRAD on both FMGS

CIRCLING APPROACH
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-F-00014570.0001001 / 29 MAY 13

GENERAL
The circling approach is the visual phase of an instrument approach to bring an aircraft into
position for landing on a runway which is not suitably located for a straight-in approach.
CAUTION The flight crew must conduct the flight within the circling area, while maintaining
required visual references at all times.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-F-00014569.0001001 / 29 MAY 13

APPROACH PREPARATION
For a circling approach, the approach preparation should include the following additional items in
the FMS programming.
F-PLN
Introduce the instrument approach procedure, including the missed approach procedure for
instrument approach.
SEC F-PLN
The landing runway must be inserted into the SEC F-PLN.
Update the SEC F-PLN as follows:
‐ Copy the active F-PLN
‐ Revise the landing runway.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 22/28
← D to E → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-F-00014568.0001001 / 29 MAY 13

INSTRUMENT APPROACH
The flight crew flies a stabilized approach at "F" speed, configuration 3 and landing gear down.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-F-00014567.0001001 / 29 MAY 13

CIRCLING APPROACH
 At the Circling MDA(H) at the latest:
Perform a level off
 At MAP, if the flight crew finds no visual reference:
Initiate a go around
 When required conditions for circling are satisfied:
Select TRK FPA
Proceed to downwind leg
At any time in the downwind leg, activate the SEC F-PLN
Disconnect the AP and remove the FDs at the latest before starting the descent toward the
runway
Set the landing configuration when appropriate, but ensure early stabilization in final.
If, at any time during the circling procedure, the required visual references are lost, initiate a
go around following the missed approach of the initial instrument approach (unless otherwise
specified).

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 23/28
←E→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-F-00014566.0001001 / 30 JUN 16

CIRCLING APPROACH PATTERN

RNAV VISUAL APPROACH


Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-G-00016048.0001001 / 23 DEC 14

GENERAL
The aircraft navigates using the RNAV system, but the position is monitored by visual reference to
the ground, obstacles and other traffic.
RNAV visual approach must be stored and retrievable from the Navigation Database.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 24/28
← E to F → 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-G-00016049.0001001 / 23 DEC 14

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
‐ 1 FMS
‐ 1 GPS or 2 DME to update FM position
‐ Additional requirement if indicated on the approach chart.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-G-00016050.0001001 / 04 JUN 19

FMGC GUIDANCE MODE


 If no required accuracy is published:
The use of FMGC guidance mode is at flight crew discretion.
 If RNAV 1 or RNP 1 is required on the published approach chart:
The flight crew should use adequate FMGC guidance modes.
Note: The use of lateral and vertical managed guidance modes reduces the crew workload and
improves energy management.

For RNAV VISUAL approach including RF legs, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SP-30 General for RF leg
flying technique.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-G-00016051.0001001 / 23 DEC 14

DESCENT PREPARATION
For approach data insertion in the FMS, keep the BARO/MDA field empty on the PERF APPR
Page.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-G-00016052.0001001 / 23 DEC 14

DESCENT
For RNAV VISUAL approaches requiring GPS, check that GPS PRIMARY is available on at least
1 FMS.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-G-00016053.0001001 / 21 MAR 17

FINAL APPROACH
The flight crew must disconnect the AP at the latest at the Minimum Use Height of the AP.
Refer to LIM-AFS-10 Autopilot Function

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 25/28
←F 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

VISUAL APPROACH
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-H-00014574.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: CEO A321

GENERAL
Perform the approach on a nominal 3 ° glideslope using visual references. Approach to be
stabilized by 500 ft AGL on the correct approach path, in the landing configuration, at VAPP.
Method:
‐ The AP is not used
‐ Both FDs are OFF
‐ FPV use is recommended
‐ A/THR use is recommended with managed speed.
Bear in mind the possible risk of optical illusions due to hindered night vision.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-H-00014574.0002001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: CFM A319/20 LEAP1A

GENERAL
Perform the approach on a nominal 3 ° glideslope using visual references. Approach to be
stabilized by 500 ft AGL on the correct approach path, in the landing configuration, at VAPP.
Method:
‐ The AP is not used
‐ Both FDs are OFF
‐ FPV use is recommended
‐ A/THR use is recommended with managed speed.
Bear in mind the possible risk of optical illusions due to hindered night vision.
Note: If the forecasted tailwind at landing is greater than 10 kt, decelerated approach is not
allowed, and the speed should be stabilized around VREF + 5 kt in final.

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-H-00014573.0001001 / 08 AUG 13


Applicable to: ALL

INITIAL/INTERMEDIATE APPROACH
The flight plan selected on the MCDU should include the selection of the landing runway. The
downwind leg may also be part of the flight plan. This may be a useful indication of the aircraft
position in the circuit on the ND.
However, visual references must be used.
Therefore, at the beginning of the downwind leg:

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 26/28
G→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Manually ACTIVATE APPR


Select FDs to OFF
Select TRK FPA to have FPV displayed
Check A/THR active.
Extend the downwind leg to 3 s/100 ft (± 1 s/1 kt of headwind / tailwind).
Turn into base leg with a maximum of 30 ° of bank. Descent with approximate FPA, in FLAPS 2, at
F speed.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-H-00014572.0001001 / 29 MAY 13
Applicable to: ALL

FINAL APPROACH
The speed trend arrow and FPV help the flight crew make timely and correct thrust settings (if in
manual thrust), and approach path corrections.
Avoid descending through the correct approach path with idle thrust. (Late recognition of this
situation without a prompt thrust increase may lead to considerable speed decay and altitude
loss).
Ensure that the aircraft is stabilized on the final descent path at VAPP (or ground speed mini)
in the landing configuration with the thrust stabilized (usually above idle) at 500 ft above airfield
elevation or as restricted by Operator policies/regulations.
If the aircraft is not stabilized, the flight crew must initiate a go around, unless they think that only
small corrections are necessary to rectify minor deviations from stabilized conditions due, amongst
others, to external perturbations.
Avoid any tendency to “duck under” in the late stages of the approach.
Avoid destabilizing the approach in the last 100 ft, in order to have the best chance of performing a
good touchdown at the desired position.

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 27/28
←G→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - APPROACH
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C-H-00014571.0001001 / 08 DEC 14


Applicable to: ALL

VISUAL APPROACH (1 OR 2 ENGINES) PATTERN

PRO-NOR-SOP-18-C P 28/28
←G 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

MANUAL LANDING
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-A-00010351.0011001 / 25 APR 17

FLARE
The cockpit cut-off angle is 20 °.
 In stabilized approach conditions, the flare height is approximately 30 ft:
FLARE........................................................................................................................ PERFORM
Avoid flaring high. Refer to Ground Clearance Diagram.
ATTITUDE................................................................................................................... MONITOR
THRUST levers.................................................................................................................... IDLE
If autothrust is engaged, it automatically disconnects when the pilot sets both thrust levers to
the IDLE detent.
In manual landing conditions, the "RETARD" callout is triggered at 20 ft radio height, in order
to remind the pilot to retard the thrust levers.
Note: The ground spoilers extension is inhibited if:
‐ Both thrust levers remain above the idle detent, or
‐ One thrust lever is above idle and one thrust lever is at idle detent.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-A-00010352.0001001 / 04 NOV 20

AT TOUCHDOWN
DEROTATION...................................................................................................................... INITIATE
‐ Lower the nosewheel without undue delay.
‐ The PM continues to monitor the attitude.
ALL THRUST LEVERS................................................................................ REV MAX or REV IDLE
The flight crew must select reverse thrust immediately after main landing gear touchdown.
The flight crew must immediately select REV MAX, if any of the following occurs at any time during
the landing:
‐ An emergency
‐ The deceleration is not as expected
‐ A failure affects the landing performance
‐ A long flare or a long touchdown
‐ An unexpected tailwind.
A small pitch up may occur during thrust reversers deployment before nose landing gear
touchdown. However, the flight crew can easily control this pitch up.
As soon as the flight crew selects reverse thrust, they must perform a full-stop landing.

PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 1/6
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

GROUND SPOILERS....................................................................................... CHECK/ANNOUNCE


Check that the WHEEL SD page displays the ground spoilers extended after touchdown.
If no ground spoilers are extended:
‐ Verify and confirm that both thrust levers are set to IDLE or REV detent.
‐ Set both thrust reverser levers to REV MAX, and fully press the brake pedals.
Note: If ground spoilers are not armed, ground spoilers extend at reverser thrust selection.
REVERSERS.................................................................................................... CHECK/ANNOUNCE
‐ Check that the ECAM E/WD displays that the reverse deployment is as expected (REV green).
‐ If reverser(s) do not deploy as expected, one of the main deceleration means is lost. The flight
crew should consider adapting the available deceleration means to stop the aircraft.
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL.................................................................................MONITOR/ENSURE
‐ Monitor directional control, if the rollout is automatic.
‐ Ensure directional control, if rollout is manual. Use rudder pedals for directional control.
‐ Do not use the nosewheel steering control handle before reaching taxi speed.
‐ During rollout, the flight crew should avoid sidestick inputs (either lateral or longitudinal).
‐ If directional control problems are encountered, the flight crew should reduce thrust to reverse
idle until directional control is satisfactory.
BRAKES............................................................................................................................. AS RQRD
‐ Monitor the autobrake, if it is ON. When required, brake with the pedals
‐ Although the green hydraulic system supplies the braking system, if pedals are pressed rapidly,
a brake pressure indication appears briefly on the BRAKE PRESS indicator.
‐ Braking may begin before the nosewheel has touched down, if required for performance
reasons. However, when comfort is the priority, the flight crew should delay braking until the
nosewheel has touched down.
Note: If no ground spoilers are extended, the autobrake is not activated.
DECELERATION.............................................................................................. CHECK/ANNOUNCE
The deceleration is felt by the flight crew, and confirmed by the speed trend on the PFD.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-A-00010353.0001001 / 17 JUL 13

AT 70 KT
SEVENTY KNOTS......................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
BOTH THRUST LEVERS.................................................................................................. REV IDLE
It is better to reduce thrust when passing 70 kt. However, high levels of reverse thrust may be
used in order to control aircraft speed in the case of an emergency.

PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 2/6
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

CAUTION Avoid the use of high levels of reverse thrust at low airspeed, unless required due
to an emergency. The distortion of the airflow, caused by gases reentering the
compressor, can cause engine stalls that may result in excessive EGT.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-A-00010354.0001001 / 05 JUN 18

AT TAXI SPEED
REVERSERS............................................................................................................................STOW
L2 ‐ When the aircraft reaches the taxi speed, and before it leaves the runway, stow the reversers.
‐ On snow-covered grounds, the reversers should be stowed when the aircraft speed reaches
25 kt.
‐ When deselecting the reversers, be careful not to apply forward thrust by moving the thrust
levers beyond the FWD IDLE position.
L1 CAUTION Except in an emergency, do not use the reverse thrust to control the aircraft
speed while on taxiways.
L2 On taxiways, the use of reversers, even restricted to idle thrust, would have the following effects:
‐ The engines may ingest fine sand and debris that may be detrimental to the engines and
airframe systems.
‐ On snow–covered areas, snow will recirculate into the air inlet, and may cause an engine
flameout or rollback.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-A-00010355.0001001 / 30 MAR 15

BEFORE 20 KT
AUTO BRK................................................................................................................... DISENGAGE
Disengage the autobrake to avoid some brake jerks at low speed.
The flight crew should use brake pedals to disengage the autobrake.

AUTOLAND
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-B-00020897.0001001 / 20 MAR 17

The following items must be performed in addition to previous Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-APPROACH


USING LOC G/S.

PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 3/6
← A to B → 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-B-00020898.0001001 / 20 MAR 17

AT 350 FT RA
ILS/GLS  /MLS  COURSE on PFD............................................................................ CHECK
If the ILS/GLS  /MLS  course pointer and the runway track differ by more than 5 °, autoland
is not authorized.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-B-00020899.0001001 / 20 MAR 17

AT 40 FT RA
FLARE mode................................................................................. CHECK ENGAGED/ANNOUNCE
Monitor flare by flight instrument.
If NO FLARE mode at 30 ft, discontinue the approach or perform a manual landing if visual
references are acquired.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-B-00020900.0001001 / 20 MAR 17

AT 30 FT RA
THRUST IDLE........................................................................................................................ CHECK
Monitor thrust reduction.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-B-00020901.0001001 / 20 MAR 17

AT 10 FT RA
BOTH THRUST LEVERS........................................................................................................... IDLE
Retard thrust levers at the "RETARD" autocallout.
LATERAL GUIDANCE....................................................................................................... MONITOR
Monitor the lateral guidance by using external references.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-B-00020902.0001001 / 04 NOV 20

AT TOUCHDOWN
Note: In the case of NWS or Anti-Skid failure, set the AP OFF at touchdown.
ROLL OUT mode...........................................................................CHECK ENGAGED/ANNOUNCE
BOTH THRUST LEVERS.............................................................................REV MAX or REV IDLE
The flight crew must select reverse thrust immediately after main landing gear touchdown.
The flight crew must immediately select REV MAX, if any of the following occurs at any time during
the landing:
‐ An emergency
‐ The deceleration is not as expected
‐ A failure affects the landing performance

PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 4/6
←B→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

‐ A long flare or a long touchdown


‐ An unexpected tailwind.
A small pitch up may occur during thrust reversers deployment before nose landing gear
touchdown. However, the auto-flight system will control this pitch up.
As soon as the flight crew selects reverse thrust, they must perform a full-stop landing.
GROUND SPOILERS....................................................................................... CHECK/ANNOUNCE
Check that the WHEEL SD page displays the ground spoilers extended after touchdown.
If no ground spoilers are extended:
‐ Verify and confirm that both thrust levers are set to IDLE or REV detent.
‐ Set both thrust reverser levers to REV MAX, and fully press the brake pedals.
Note: If ground spoilers are not armed, ground spoilers extend at reverser thrust selection.
REVERSERS.................................................................................................... CHECK/ANNOUNCE
‐ Check that the ECAM E/WD displays that the reverse deployment is as expected (REV green).
‐ If reverser(s) do not deploy as expected, one of the main deceleration means is lost. The flight
crew should consider adapting the available deceleration means to stop the aircraft.
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL.................................................................................MONITOR/ENSURE
‐ Monitor directional control, if the rollout is automatic.
‐ Ensure directional control, if rollout is manual. Use rudder pedals for directional control.
‐ Do not use the nosewheel steering control handle before reaching taxi speed.
‐ During rollout, the flight crew should avoid sidestick inputs (either lateral or longitudinal).
‐ If directional control problems are encountered, the flight crew should reduce thrust to reverse
idle until directional control is satisfactory.
BRAKES............................................................................................................................. AS RQRD
‐ Monitor the autobrake, if it is ON. When required, brake with the pedals
‐ Although the green hydraulic system supplies the braking system, if pedals are pressed rapidly,
a brake pressure indication appears briefly on the BRAKE PRESS indicator.
‐ Braking may begin before the nosewheel has touched down, if required for performance
reasons. However, when comfort is the priority, the flight crew should delay braking until the
nosewheel has touched down.
Note: If no ground spoilers are extended, the autobrake is not activated.
DECELERATION.............................................................................................. CHECK/ANNOUNCE
The deceleration is felt by the flight crew, and confirmed by the speed trend on the PFD.

PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 5/6
←B→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-B-00020904.0001001 / 11 JUL 17

AT 70 KT
SEVENTY KNOTS......................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
BOTH THRUST LEVERS.................................................................................................. REV IDLE
It is better to reduce thrust when passing 70 kt. However, high levels of reverse thrust may be
used in order to control aircraft speed in the case of an emergency.
CAUTION Avoid the use of high levels of reverse thrust at low airspeed, unless required due
to an emergency. The distortion of the airflow, caused by gases reentering the
compressor, can cause engine stalls that may result in excessive EGT.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-B-00020905.0001001 / 20 MAR 17

BEFORE 20 KT
AUTO BRK.................................................................................................................... DISENGAGE
Disengage autobrake before 20 kt to avoid some brake jerks at low speed.
The flight crew should use brake pedals to disengage the autobrake.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-19-B-00020906.0001001 / 05 JUN 18

END OF ROLL OUT


REVERSERS............................................................................................................................STOW
L2 ‐ When the aircraft reaches the taxi speed, and before it leaves the runway, stow the reversers.
‐ On snow-covered grounds, the reversers should be stowed when the aircraft speed reaches
25 kt.
‐ When deselecting the reversers, be careful not to apply forward thrust by moving the thrust
levers beyond the FWD IDLE position.
L1 CAUTION Except in an emergency, do not use the reverse thrust to control the aircraft
speed while on taxiways.
L2 On taxiways, the use of reversers, even restricted to idle thrust, would have the following effects:
‐ The engines may ingest fine sand and debris that may be detrimental to the engines and
airframe systems.
‐ On snow–covered areas, snow will recirculate into the air inlet, and may cause an engine
flameout or rollback.
L1 AP.................................................................................................................................................OFF
Disengage the APs at the end of the roll out (when leaving the runway at the latest).

PRO-NOR-SOP-19 P 6/6
←B 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GO-AROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

GO AROUND WITH FD
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-20-A-00011576.0006001 / 03 DEC 19
Applicable to: A319/20 CEO

Apply the following three actions simultaneously:


THRUST LEVERS........................................................................................................................ TOGA
If TOGA thrust is not required, set the thrust levers to TOGA detent then retard the thrust levers as
required. This enables to engage the GO-AROUND phase, with associated AP/FD modes.
The flight crew may use CL detent to have benefit of A/THR.
Note: If the thrust levers are not set briefly to TOGA detent, the FMS does not engage the
GO-AROUND phase, and flying over, or close to the airport will sequence the Destination
waypoint in the F-PLN.
ROTATION............................................................................................................................PERFORM
Initiate rotation towards 15 ° of pitch with all engines operative (approximately 12.5 ° if one engine is
out) to get a positive rate of climb, then follow the SRS Flight Director orders.
When near the ground, avoid excessive rotation rate in order to prevent a tail strike.
GO AROUND .................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
FLAPS lever............................................................................................................SELECT AS RQRD
Retract one step of flaps.
FMA.................................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
The following modes are displayed: MAN TOGA / SRS / GA TRK / A/THR (in blue).
POSITIVE CLIMB ..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
L/G UP ......................................................................................................................................ORDER
L/G...................................................................................................................................... SELECT UP
NAV or HDG mode................................................................................................................ AS RQRD
Reselect NAV or HDG, as required (minimum height 100 ft).
AP...........................................................................................................................................AS RQRD
Note: Go-around may be flown with both autopilots engaged. Whenever any other mode
engages, AP 2 disengages.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-20-A-00011576.0014001 / 03 DEC 19
Applicable to: A321 CEO

Apply the following three actions simultaneously:


THRUST LEVERS........................................................................................................................ TOGA
If TOGA thrust is not required, set the thrust levers to TOGA detent then retard the thrust levers as
required. This enables to engage the GO-AROUND phase, with associated AP/FD modes.
The flight crew may use CL detent to have benefit of A/THR.

PRO-NOR-SOP-20 P 1/6
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GO-AROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Note: If the thrust levers are not set briefly to TOGA detent, the FMS does not engage the
GO-AROUND phase, and flying over, or close to the airport will sequence the Destination
waypoint in the F-PLN.
ROTATION............................................................................................................................PERFORM
Initiate rotation towards 15 ° of pitch with all engines operative (approximately 12.5 ° if one engine is
out) to get a positive rate of climb, then follow the SRS Flight Director orders.
When near the ground, avoid excessive rotation rate in order to prevent a tail strike.
GO AROUND .................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
FLAPS lever............................................................................................................SELECT AS RQRD
Retract one step of flaps.
FMA.................................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
The following modes are displayed: MAN TOGA / SRS / GA TRK or NAV / A/THR (in blue).
Depending on the guidance modes during approach, NAV mode is either automatically armed or
automatically engaged.
POSITIVE CLIMB ..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
L/G UP ......................................................................................................................................ORDER
L/G...................................................................................................................................... SELECT UP
NAV or HDG mode................................................................................................................ AS RQRD
Reselect NAV or HDG, as required (minimum height 100 ft).
AP...........................................................................................................................................AS RQRD
Note: Go-around may be flown with both autopilots engaged. Whenever any other mode
engages, AP 2 disengages.

PRO-NOR-SOP-20 P 2/6
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GO-AROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-20-A-00011576.0043001 / 03 DEC 19


Applicable to: LEAP1A

Simultaneously apply the following three actions:


THRUST LEVERS............................................................................................ TOGA THEN FLX/MCT
Set the thrust levers to the TOGA detent to ensure engagement of SRS GA mode. Then, set the
thrust levers to FLX/MCT to engage the GA SOFT mode.
At any time, if TOGA thrust is desired, set the thrust levers to TOGA detent.
Note: If the thrust levers are not set briefly to TOGA detent, the FMS does not engage the
GO-AROUND phase, and flying over, or close to the airport will sequence the Destination
waypoint in the F-PLN.
ROTATION............................................................................................................................PERFORM
Initiate rotation towards 15 ° of pitch with all engines operative (approximately 12.5 ° if one engine is
out) to get a positive rate of climb, then follow the SRS Flight Director orders.
When near the ground, avoid excessive rotation rate in order to prevent a tail strike.
GO AROUND .................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
FLAPS lever............................................................................................................SELECT AS RQRD
Retract one step of flaps.

PRO-NOR-SOP-20 P 3/6
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GO-AROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

FMA.......................................................................................................................CHECK/ANNOUNCE
The following modes are displayed: MAN GA SOFT / SRS / GA TRK or NAV / A/THR (in blue).
If the FMA does not display MAN GA SOFT or MAN TOGA, immediately set the thrust levers to the
TOGA detent.
Depending on the guidance modes during approach, NAV mode is either automatically armed or
automatically engaged.
POSITIVE CLIMB ..............................................................................................................ANNOUNCE
L/G UP ......................................................................................................................................ORDER
L/G...................................................................................................................................... SELECT UP
NAV or HDG mode................................................................................................................ AS RQRD
Reselect NAV or HDG, as required (minimum height 100 ft).
AP...........................................................................................................................................AS RQRD
Note: Go-around may be flown with both autopilots engaged. Whenever any other mode
engages, AP 2 disengages.

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-20-A-00011579.0002001 / 13 AUG 10


Applicable to: ALL

AT GO-AROUND THRUST REDUCTION ALTITUDE


THRUST levers.............................................................................................................................. CL
LVR CLB flashing on FMA.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-20-A-00011581.0001001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: ALL

AT GO-AROUND ACCELERATION ALTITUDE


Monitor that the target speed increases to green dot.
 If the target speed does not increase to green dot:
ALT knob........................................................................................................ CHECK and PULL
 At F speed:
FLAPS 1.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 1......................................................................................................................... SELECT

PRO-NOR-SOP-20 P 4/6
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GO-AROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

 At S speed:
FLAPS 0.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 0......................................................................................................................... SELECT
GND SPLRS...................................................................................................................DISARM
NOSE sw...............................................................................................................................OFF
RWY TURN OFF sw.............................................................................................................OFF
OTHER EXTERIOR LIGHTS.......................................................................................AS RQRD
The flight crew can maintain the LAND LIGHTS selector set to ON, according to airline policy
or regulatory recommendations.
Note: Consider the next step:
‐ Engage NAV mode, to follow the published missed approach procedure, or
‐ Prepare for a second approach by selecting the ACTIVATE APP PHASE, and
CONFIRM on the PERF page.

AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB CHECKLIST down to the line............................................... COMPLETE

GO AROUND WITH NO FD
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-20-B-00011585.0011001 / 30 JUN 15

A go-around may have to be made without FD guidance (visual or non-precision approaches).


Apply the following three actions simultaneously:
THRUST LEVERS........................................................................................................................ TOGA
If TOGA thrust is not required, set the thrust levers to TOGA detent then retard the thrust levers as
required. This enables to engage the GO-AROUND phase, with associated AP/FD modes.
The flight crew may use CL detent to have benefit of A/THR.
Note: If the thrust levers are not set briefly to TOGA detent, the FMS does not engage the
GO-AROUND phase, and flying over, or close to the airport (less than 5 NM) will sequence
the Destination waypoint in the F-PLN.
ROTATION.....................................................................................................................15 ° OF PITCH
Rotate to 12.5 °, if one engine is out.
When near the ground, avoid excessive rotation rate in order to prevent a tail strike.
GO AROUND..................................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
FLAPS lever....................................................................................................... RETRACT ONE STEP
POSITIVE CLIMB............................................................................................................... ANNOUNCE
L/G UP....................................................................................................................................... ORDER

PRO-NOR-SOP-20 P 5/6
← A to B → 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - GO-AROUND
OPERATING MANUAL

L/G...................................................................................................................................... SELECT UP
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-20-B-00011586.0001001 / 13 AUG 10

AT GO-AROUND THRUST REDUCTION ALTITUDE


Disregard CLB or LVR CLB flashing on the FMA.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-20-B-00011587.0001001 / 23 JUN 15

AT GO-AROUND ACCELERATION ALTITUDE


For a go-around with no FD, thrust reduction and acceleration altitude should be the same.
Select speed target to green dot.
Adjust aircraft attitude to 10/12 °.
Select thrust levers to CL detent and activate the A/THR (if the autothrust is not automatically
engaged).
Set FD to ON. (Basic mode HDG V/S or TRK FPA engages).
Select appropriate mode.
Check FMA.
 At F speed:
FLAPS 1.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 1......................................................................................................................... SELECT
 At S speed:
FLAPS 0.......................................................................................................................... ORDER
FLAPS 0......................................................................................................................... SELECT
GND SPLRS...................................................................................................................DISARM
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.............................................................................................................. SET
Set to OFF the NOSE sw and the RWY TURN OFF sw.
The flight crew can maintain the LAND LIGHTS selector set to ON, according to airline policy
or regulatory recommendations.
Monitor go-around routing and first cleared altitude.
Note: If thrust levers are set to CL detent at thrust reduction altitude, a thrust reduction may
occur, if the current speed is above the speed target (Refer to PRO-NOR-SRP-01-80
Monitoring the Go-Around).
AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB CHECKLIST down to the line............................................... COMPLETE

PRO-NOR-SOP-20 P 6/6
←B 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

AFTER LANDING
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011841.0001001 / 06 DEC 16
Applicable to: ALL

GRND SPLRS...........................................................................................................................DISARM
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011840.0001001 / 05 MAR 18
Applicable to: ALL

EXTERIOR LIGHTS
LAND lights sw.................................................................................................................. RETRACT
 When leaving the runway:
STROBE sw....................................................................................................................... AUTO
NOSE sw.............................................................................................................................. TAXI
 When crossing a runway:
STROBE sw............................................................................................................................ ON
OTHER EXTERIOR LIGHTS............................................................................................. AS RQRD
L2 During taxi, the PF may ask the PM to set the exterior lights.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011842.0001001 / 22 APR 16
Applicable to: 1

RADAR.............................................................................................................................................OFF
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011843.0001001 / 06 JAN 16
Applicable to: 2

PREDICTIVE WINDSHEAR SYSTEM  .....................................................................................OFF


Switching the radar and predictive windshear system to OFF after landing avoids risk of radiating
persons at the gate area.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00013145.0001001 / 06 JAN 16
Applicable to: 3

WXR/PWS switch............................................................................................................................ OFF


CAPT DISPLAY mode selector....................................................................................................... OFF
F/O DISPLAY mode selector...........................................................................................................OFF
Switching the radar and radar display to OFF after landing avoids risk of radiating persons at the gate
area.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011844.0001001 / 13 DEC 10
Applicable to: ALL

ENG MODE selector....................................................................................................................NORM

PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 1/8
A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011845.0002001 / 05 JUN 18


Applicable to: NEO

FLAPS.................................................................................................................................... RETRACT
Set the FLAPS lever to position 0.
If the approach was made in icing conditions, or if the runway was contaminated with slush or snow,
do not retract the flaps and slats until after engine shutdown and after the ground crew has confirmed
that flaps and slats are clear of obstructing ice.
On ground, hot weather conditions may cause overheating to be detected around the bleed ducts
in the wings, resulting in “AIR L (R) WING LEAK” warnings. Such warnings may be avoided during
transit by keeping the slats in Configuration 1 when the OAT is above 30 °C.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011845.0001001 / 08 AUG 13
Applicable to: CEO

FLAPS.................................................................................................................................... RETRACT
Set the FLAPS lever to position 0.
If the approach was made in icing conditions, or if the runway was contaminated with slush or snow,
do not retract the flaps and slats until after engine shutdown and after the ground crew has confirmed
that flaps and slats are clear of obstructing ice.
On ground, hot weather conditions may cause overheating to be detected around the bleed ducts
in the wings, resulting in “AIR L (R) WING LEAK” warnings. Such warnings may be avoided during
transit by keeping the slats in Configuration 1 when the OAT is above 30 °C.
To avoid damage on the RTLU (Rudder Travel Limit Unit) mechanical stop, the SLATS/FLAPS
should be retracted before all ADIRS are set to OFF simultaneously.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011846.0002001 / 19 FEB 19
Applicable to: 1

TCAS.......................................................................................................................................... XPNDR
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011846.0001001 / 04 JUL 17
Applicable to: 2

TCAS............................................................................................................................................. STBY
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011847.0001001 / 20 JAN 15
Applicable to: 3

ATC........................................................................................................................................ AS RQRD
ATC is set in accordance with airport requirements.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011848.0001001 / 17 MAR 15
Applicable to: ALL

APU............................................................................................................................................. START
APU START may be delayed until just prior to engine shutdown.

PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 2/8
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

Note: Prolonged use of the APU may cause a fuel imbalance. Pay particular attention to the fuel
imbalance limitation for the next take-off.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011849.0005001 / 04 NOV 20
Applicable to: CFM

CAUTION In icing conditions (Refer to LIM-ICE_RAIN Definition of Icing Conditions), the flight
crew must turn on the engine anti-ice and should not wait until seeing ice building
up.
ANTI ICE................................................................................................................................ AS RQRD
‐ If engine anti-ice is used, take care to control taxi speed, especially on wet or slippery surfaces
(N1 ground idle is increased).
‐ During ground operation, when in icing conditions and when the OAT is at +3 °C or below for more
than 30 min, the following procedure should be applied for ice shedding:
CAUTION If, during thrust increase, the aircraft starts to move, immediately retard the thrust
levers to IDLE.
If ground surface conditions and the environment permit, the flight crew should accelerate the
engines to approximately 70 % of N1 for 30 s at intervals not greater than 30 min.
If ground surface or environment do not permit to accelerate the engine to 70 % N1, then power
setting and dwell time should be as high as practical.
When operating in conditions of freezing rain, freezing drizzle, freezing fog or heavy snow, ice
shedding may be enhanced, by additional run ups at intervals, to not exceed 10 min, advancing
throttles to 70 % N1 momentarily (no hold time).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011849.0002001 / 27 FEB 18
Applicable to: V2500

CAUTION In icing conditions (Refer to LIM-ICE_RAIN Definition of Icing Conditions), the flight
crew must turn on the engine anti-ice and should not wait until seeing ice building
up.

PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 3/8
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

ANTI ICE................................................................................................................................ AS RQRD


‐ If engine anti-ice is used, take care to control taxi speed, especially on wet or slippery surfaces.
(N1 ground idle is increased).
‐ During ground operation, when in icing conditions and the OAT is plus 3 °C or less, the following
procedure should be applied for ice shedding:
CAUTION If, during thrust increase, the aircraft starts to move, immediately retard the thrust
levers to IDLE.
If ground surface conditions and the environment permit, the flight crew should accelerate the
engines to minimum 50 % of N1 at intervals not greater than 15 min. There is no requirement to
maintain the high thrust settings.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011849.0004001 / 01 MAR 18
Applicable to: LEAP1A

CAUTION In icing conditions (Refer to LIM-ICE_RAIN Definition of Icing Conditions), the flight
crew must turn on the engine anti-ice and should not wait until seeing ice building
up.
ANTI ICE................................................................................................................................ AS RQRD
‐ If engine anti-ice is used, take care to control taxi speed, especially on wet or slippery surfaces.
(N1 ground idle is increased).
‐ During ground operation, when in icing conditions and the OAT is plus 3 °C or less, the following
procedure should be applied for ice shedding:
CAUTION If, during thrust increase, the aircraft starts to move, immediately retard the thrust
levers to IDLE.
If ground surface conditions and the environment permit, the flight crew should accelerate the
engines to approximately 50 % of N1 for 5 s at intervals not greater than 60 min. If ground surface
or environment do not permit to accelerate the engine to 50 % N1, then power setting and dwell
time should be as high as practical.

PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 4/8
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011850.0001001 / 17 OCT 17


Applicable to: A319/20

BRAKE TEMPERATURE........................................................................................................... CHECK


‐ Check brake temperature on the WHEEL SD page for discrepancies and high temperature
‐ Maintenance action is due in the following cases:
• The temperature difference between two brakes of a gear is more than 150 °C, and the
temperature of one of these brakes is above or equal to 600 °C, or
• The temperature difference between two brakes of a gear is more than 150 °C, and the
temperature of one of these brakes is below or equal to 60 °C, or
• The difference between the average temperature of the left gear brakes and right brakes is
above or equal to 200 °C, or
• The temperature of one brake exceeds 900 °C.
BRK FAN pb-sw  .................................................................................................. AS REQUIRED
When the turnaround time is short or if the temperature of any brake is likely to exceed 500 °C, use
the brake fans without delay. In other cases, the flight crew should delay brake fans selection to
5 min after landing, or approaching the gate, whichever occurs first.
L2 For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-270 Use of Brake Fans.

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011850.0003001 / 17 OCT 17


Applicable to: A321

BRAKE TEMPERATURE........................................................................................................... CHECK


‐ Check brake temperature on the WHEEL SD page for discrepancies and high temperature
‐ Maintenance action is due in the following cases:
• The temperature difference between two brakes of a gear is more than 150 °C, and the
temperature of one of these brakes is above or equal to 600 °C, or
• The temperature difference between two brakes of a gear is more than 150 °C, and the
temperature of one of these brakes is below or equal to 60 °C, or
• The difference between the average temperature of the left gear brakes and right brakes is
above or equal to 200 °C, or
• The temperature of one brake exceeds 800 °C.
BRK FAN pb-sw  .................................................................................................. AS REQUIRED
When the turnaround time is short or if the temperature of any brake is likely to exceed 500 °C, use
the brake fans without delay. In other cases, the flight crew should delay brake fans selection to
5 min after landing, or approaching the gate, whichever occurs first.
L2 For more information, Refer to FCTM/PR-NP-SOP-270 Use of Brake Fans.

PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 5/8
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00011851.0001001 / 10 AUG 10


Applicable to: ALL

AFTER LANDING CHECKLIST.......................................................................................... COMPLETE


Ensure that the after-landing checks are completed, once the aircraft has cleared the runway.

PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 6/8
←A→ 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-21-A-00020077.0001001 / 17 MAR 17


Applicable to: ALL

AFTER LANDING - FLOW PATTERN


After Landing Flow Pattern

PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 7/8
←A 29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - AFTER LANDING
OPERATING MANUAL

Intentionally left blank

PRO-NOR-SOP-21 P 8/8
29 MAR 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PARKING
OPERATING MANUAL

PARKING
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011852.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

Prior to performing this check, consider “GROUND OPERATIONS IN HEAVY RAIN” (Refer to
PRO-NOR-SUP-ADVWXR Ground Operations in Heavy Rain).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011853.0003001 / 20 JUL 15
Applicable to: ALL

ACCU PRESS indicator............................................................................................................. CHECK


The ACCU PRESS indication must be in the green band. In case of low accumulator pressure,
chocks are required before engine 1 shutdown.
PARKING BRAKE handle................................................................................................................. ON
When one brake temperature is above 500 °C (or 350 °C with brake fans  ON), avoid applying
the parking brake, unless operationally necessary.
BRAKES PRESS indicator.........................................................................................................CHECK
Check for normal indications.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011854.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

ANTI-ICE..........................................................................................................................................OFF
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011855.0001001 / 04 DEC 18
Applicable to: ALL

APU BLEED pb-sw............................................................................................................................ON


Select APU bleed ON, just before engine shutdown, to minimize odors of engine exhaust fumes in air
conditioning.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011856.0008001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: LEAP1A

 If the APU is not available:


EXT PWR pb.............................................................................................................................. ON
 No less than 3 min after high thrust operations:
ALL ENG MASTERS................................................................................................................ OFF
Check that engine parameters decrease.
The DOOR/OXY SD page is displayed on the lower ECAM display.

PRO-NOR-SOP-22 P 1/8
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PARKING
OPERATING MANUAL

L2 Note: The flight crew must operate the engines at or near idle thrust for a cooling period of
3 min before engine shutdown, in order to thermally stabilize the engines.
Idle reverse thrust and normal thrust to maneuver during taxi (i.e. at or near idle), are
not considered as high thrust operations. Therefore, both of the following applies:
‐ If the flight crew uses idle reverse thrust for landing and normal thrust to maneuver
during taxi after landing, the cooling period starts when the flight crew retards the
thrust lever during the flare
‐ If the flight crew uses maximum reverse for landing, the cooling period starts when
the flight crew sets the thrust lever to idle reverse during the landing rollout.
Before engine shutdown, routine cooling periods that last less than the required time,
can result in engine degradation.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011856.0005001 / 04 JUN 19
Applicable to: V2500

 If the APU is not available:


EXT PWR pb.............................................................................................................................. ON
 No less than 3 min after high thrust operations:
ALL ENG MASTERS ............................................................................................................... OFF
Check that engine parameters decrease.
The DOOR/OXY SD page is displayed on the lower ECAM display.
L2 Note: The flight crew should operate the engines at or near idle thrust for a cooling period of
3 min before engine shutdown, in order to thermally stabilize the engines.
Idle reverse thrust and normal thrust to maneuver during taxi (i.e. at or near idle), are
not considered as high thrust operations. Therefore, both of the following applies:
‐ If the flight crew uses idle reverse thrust for landing and normal thrust to maneuver
during taxi after landing, the cooling period starts when the flight crew retards the
thrust lever during the flare
‐ If the flight crew uses maximum reverse for landing, the cooling period starts when
the flight crew sets the thrust lever to idle reverse during the landing rollout.
Before engine shutdown, routine cooling periods that last less than the recommended
time, can result in engine degradation.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011856.0004001 / 04 JUN 19
Applicable to: CFM

 If the APU is not available:


EXT PWR pb.............................................................................................................................. ON

PRO-NOR-SOP-22 P 2/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PARKING
OPERATING MANUAL

 No less than 3 min after high thrust operations:


ALL ENG MASTERS ............................................................................................................... OFF
CAUTION If JP4 fuel is used at ambient temperatures higher than 10 °C, dry motor the
engines for 2 min after engine shutdown. This dry motor period should start
approximately 90 s after the master lever is selected OFF.
Check that engine parameters decrease.
The DOOR/OXY SD page is displayed on the lower ECAM display.
L2 Note: The flight crew should operate the engines at or near idle thrust for a cooling period of
3 min before engine shutdown, in order to thermally stabilize the engines.
Idle reverse thrust and normal thrust to maneuver during taxi (i.e. at or near idle), are
not considered as high thrust operations. Therefore, both of the following applies:
‐ If the flight crew uses idle reverse thrust for landing and normal thrust to maneuver
during taxi after landing, the cooling period starts when the flight crew retards the
thrust lever during the flare
‐ If the flight crew uses maximum reverse for landing, the cooling period starts when
the flight crew sets the thrust lever to idle reverse during the landing rollout.
Before engine shutdown, routine cooling periods that last less than the recommended
time, can result in engine degradation.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011858.0001001 / 04 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

SLIDES...................................................................................................................CHECK DISARMED
Check slides disarmed on the DOOR/OXY SD page. Warn the cabin crew, if any slide is not
disarmed.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011860.0001001 / 04 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

SEAT BELTS sw............................................................................................................................. OFF


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011859.0001001 / 23 JUN 15
Applicable to: ALL

BEACON lights................................................................................................................................ OFF


Turn off the BEACON lights, when all engines are spooled down.
OTHER EXTERIOR LIGHTS................................................................................................. AS RQRD

PRO-NOR-SOP-22 P 3/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PARKING
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011857.0001001 / 13 AUG 10


Applicable to: ALL

GROUND CONTACT.......................................................................................................... ESTABLISH


Establish ground communication.
Check chocks in place.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011862.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: A319/20

FUEL PUMPS..................................................................................................................................OFF
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011862.0002001 / 13 MAY 16
Applicable to: A321 + NEO

FUEL PUMPS/ CTR XFR VALVES.................................................................................................OFF


Switch off the fuel pumps and the center tank transfer valves.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011864.0001001 / 04 JUL 17
Applicable to: ALL

ATC................................................................................................................................................STBY
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011865.0001001 / 04 JUN 19
Applicable to: ALL

IRS PERFORMANCE.................................................................................................................CHECK
On the MCDU POSITION MONITOR page, read the deviation of each IRS position from the FMGC
position and check that the value does not exceed the following:

PRO-NOR-SOP-22 P 4/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PARKING
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011866.0001001 / 13 AUG 10


Applicable to: ALL

FUEL QUANTITY....................................................................................................................... CHECK


Check that the sum of the fuel on board and the fuel used is consistent with the fuel on board at
departure. If an unusual discrepancy is found, maintenance action is due.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011867.0001001 / 24 FEB 15
Applicable to: ALL

STS pb (ECAM Control panel)...................................................................................................PRESS


Check the STATUS page.

PRO-NOR-SOP-22 P 5/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PARKING
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011868.0001001 / 13 AUG 10


Applicable to: ALL

(BRAKE FAN  ).......................................................................................................................... OFF


Switch off, when not required.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011869.0002001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

PARKING BRAKE.................................................................................................................. AS RQRD


The parking brake should be released after chocks are in place, if one brake temperature is above
300 °C (or above 150 °C with brake fans  ON).
Releasing the parking brake prevents the critical structures from being exposed to high temperature
levels for an extended time. However, if operational conditions dictate (e.g. slippery tarmac), the
parking brake may remain applied.
When parking with a flat tire on the nose gear, keep the parking brake on, to avoid aircraft yawing at
parking brake release.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011870.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

DUs...................................................................................................................................................DIM
Dim EFIS, ECAM and MCDU display units.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00022328.0001001 / 04 DEC 18
Applicable to: ALL

 Icing conditions identified with OAT +3 °C (37 °F) or below


TAXI-IN TIME.......................................................................................... Record in the LOGBOOK
Record the taxi-in time, or the taxi-in time after last ice shedding if performed, to determine the
remaining allowed taxi-out time for the next flight.
L2 Note: 1. When the engines are running on ground at idle in icing conditions and OAT +3 °C
(37 °F) or below, ice may accumulate on the engine fans.
2. The quantity of ice accretion depends on the total taxi time that includes taxi-in and
taxi-out time.
3. For the ice shedding procedure, Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-09 After Start - ENG
Anti-Ice.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00014395.0001001 / 04 NOV 20
Applicable to: ALL

EFB
ALL EFB transmitting mode............................................................................................... AS RQRD
In accordance with the Operator’s policy or, as required by operational regulations.

PRO-NOR-SOP-22 P 6/8
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - PARKING
OPERATING MANUAL

 If performing transit stop:


CLEAR/CLOSE FLIGHT................................................................................................... APPLY
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-22-A-00011873.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

PARKING CHECKLIST....................................................................................................... COMPLETE

PRO-NOR-SOP-22 P 7/8
←A 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
OPERATING MANUAL

SECURING THE AIRCRAFT


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-23-A-00010336.0001001 / 05 JUN 18
Applicable to: ALL

GENERAL
The flight crew should apply the following procedure as per company policy.
Airbus recommends performing the following procedure when the aircraft is left unattended: i.e.
no qualified flight crew or ground crew are in the cockpit to supervise and monitor the aircraft
systems.
Prior to performing this check, the following SUP Adverse Weather procedures should be taken
into account when appropriate:
‐ Securing the aircraft for cold soak (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ADVWXR Securing the Aircraft for
Cold Soak).
‐ Water system draining (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ADVWXR For Draining Water Procedure -
Introduction).
‐ Ground operations in heavy rain (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ADVWXR Ground Operations in
Heavy Rain).
‐ Operations on contaminated airports (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ADVWXR Parking).
‐ Operations with volcanic ash, sand or dust (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ADVWXR Securing the
Aircraft).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-23-A-00010337.0001001 / 30 JUN 15
Applicable to: ALL

PARKING BRAKE
PARK BRK handle...........................................................................................................CHECK ON
To reduce hydraulic leak rate in the brake accumulator, keep the parking brake on.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-23-A-00010338.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

OXYGEN CREW SUPPLY


OXYGEN CREW SUPPLY pb.....................................................................................................OFF
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-23-A-00010339.0001001 / 21 AUG 15
Applicable to: ALL

ADIRS
ALL IR MODE selectors.............................................................................................................. OFF
After the shutdown of the ADIRS, the flight crew must wait 10 s before the shutdown of the
electrical supply. This time ensures that the ADIRS memorize the most recent data.

PRO-NOR-SOP-23 P 1/4
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-23-A-00010340.0001001 / 05 AUG 10


Applicable to: ALL

EXTERIOR LIGHTS
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.....................................................................................................................OFF
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-23-A-00010341.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

MAINTENANCE BUS
MAINT BUS sw.................................................................................................................. AS RQRD
Should electrical power be required for the crew or servicing personnel, consider setting the
overhead MAINT BUS sw (in the forward cabin) to the ON position, prior to setting aircraft power
to off.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-23-A-00010342.0001001 / 04 MAR 14
Applicable to: ALL

APU
APU BLEED pb-sw......................................................................................................................OFF
APU MASTER SW...................................................................................................................... OFF
Switch off the APU after the passengers have disembarked.

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-23-A-00010343.0002001 / 04 MAR 14


Applicable to: ALL

EMER EXIT LT sw.......................................................................................................................... OFF


SIGNS sw........................................................................................................................................ OFF

NO PORTABLE/ELEC DEVICE sw.............................................................................................OFF

PRO-NOR-SOP-23 P 2/4
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-23-A-00010344.0001001 / 05 AUG 10


Applicable to: ALL

EXTERNAL POWER
EXT PWR pb......................................................................................................................AS RQRD
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-23-A-00010345.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

BAT 1 AND 2
BAT 1 pb-sw and BAT 2 pb-sw.................................................................................................. OFF
Wait until the APU flap is fully closed (about 2 min after the APU AVAIL light goes out), before
switching off the batteries. Switching the batteries off before the APU flap is closed may cause
smoke in the cabin during the next flight.
If the batteries are off while the APU is running, APU fire extinguishing is not available.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-23-A-00010346.0001001 / 05 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

SECURING THE AIRCRAFT CHECKLIST


SECURING THE AIRCRAFT CHECKLIST.....................................................................COMPLETE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-23-A-00014412.0001001 / 05 DEC 17
Applicable to: ALL

EFB
EFB APPLICATIONS..............................................................................................................CLOSE
ALL EFB....................................................................................................................... SWITCH OFF

PRO-NOR-SOP-23 P 3/4
←A 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
OPERATING MANUAL

COMMUNICATIONS AND STANDARD TERMS


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-00011900.0001001 / 13 AUG 10
Applicable to: ALL

Standard phraseology is essential to ensure effective crew communication. The phraseology should
be concise and exact. The following Chapter lists the callouts that should be used as standard. They
supplement the callouts identified in the SOP.
These standard Airbus callouts are also designed to promote situational awareness, and to ensure
crew understanding of systems and their use in line operation.

CHECKLIST CALLOUTS
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-00011901.0001001 / 20 DEC 10
Applicable to: ALL

‐ “CHECK”: A command for the other pilot to check an item.


‐ “CHECKED”: A response that an item has been checked.
‐ “CROSSCHECKED”: A callout verifying information from both pilot stations.
If a checklist needs to be interrupted, announce: “HOLD CHECKLIST AT ___” and “RESUME
CHECKLIST AT ___” for the continuation.
Upon completion of a checklist announce: “__CHECKLIST COMPLETE”.

ACTIONS COMMANDED BY PF
Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-A-00011902.0001001 / 13 AUG 10

GENERAL
The following commands do not necessarily initiate a guidance mode change, eg.: selected to
managed/managed to selected. The intent is to ensure clear, consistent, standard communication
between crewmembers.
All actions performed on the FCU and MCDU must be checked on the PFD and ND (eg.: “FL 350
blue”, “FL 200 magenta"). Ensure that the correct FCU knob is used, then verify indications on the
PFD/ND.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-A-00011904.0001001 / 09 JUN 15

SET
The “SET” command means using an FCU knob to set a value, but not to change a mode.
SET is accomplished by only rotating the appropriate selection knob.

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 1/12
A to C → 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Example:
‐ ”SET GO AROUND ALTITUDE__FT”
‐ “SET FL __”
‐ “SET HDG __”
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-A-00011905.0001001 / 20 DEC 10

MANAGE/PULL
The “MANAGE” command means pushing an FCU knob to engage, or arm, a managed mode or
target.
The “PULL” command means pulling an FCU knob to engage a selected mode or target. Example:
‐ "PULL HDG 090” (HDG/TRK knob is pulled and turned).
‐ “MANAGE NAV” (HDG/TRK knob is pushed).
‐ “FL 190 PULL” (ALT knob is turned and pulled).
‐ “FL 190 MANAGE” (ALT knob is turned and pushed).
‐ “PULL SPEED 250 KNOTS” (SPD/MACH knob is pulled and turned).
‐ “MANAGE SPEED” (SPD/MACH knob is pushed).
Note: If the value was previously set, there is no requirement to repeat the figure.
Simply call e.g. PULL HDG: PULL SPEED: FL PULL.
The VS/FPA knob has no managed function. The standard callouts for the use of this knob are as
follows:
V/S Plus (or Minus) 700 PULL, or
FPA Minus 3 ° PULL (V/S/FPA knob is turned and pulled)
PUSH TO LEVEL OFF (V/S/FPA knob is pushed)
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-A-00011906.0001001 / 13 AUG 10

ARM
The “ARM __” command means arming a system by pushing the specified FCU button.
e.g. : “ARM APPROACH”
e.g. : “ARM LOC.”
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-A-00011907.0001001 / 13 AUG 10

ON/OFF
The simple ON or OFF command is used for the autopilot, flight directors, autothrust and the bird
(flight path vector).
e.g.: BIRD ON (The HDG-V/S / TRK-FPA pb is pushed.)

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 2/12
←C 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
OPERATING MANUAL

FMA
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-00011908.0001001 / 23 DEC 14
Applicable to: ALL

The PF should call out any FMA change, unless specified differently (e.g. CAT II & III task sharing).
Therefore, the PF should announce:
‐ All armed modes with the associated color (e.g. blue, magenta): "G/S blue", "LOC blue".
‐ All active modes without the associated color (e.g. green, white): "NAV", "ALT".
The PM should check and respond, "CHECKED" to all FMA changes called out by the PF.

ALTITUDE
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-00011909.0001001 / 23 DEC 14
Applicable to: ALL

The PM calls out "one thousand to go" when passing 1 000 ft before the cleared altitude or FL, and
the PF calls out "checked".

FLAPS OR GEAR CALLOUTS


Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-B-00011910.0001001 / 23 DEC 14

FLAPS' CALLOUTS
FLAPS' CONFIGURATION CALLOUT
1 "FLAPS ONE"
1+F "FLAPS ONE"
0 "FLAPS ZERO"

The reply will be given when selecting the new flap position.
e.g.:
CALLOUT REMARK
PF "FLAPS ONE"
"SPEED CHECKED"
PM checks the speed:
‐ Above the S or F speed and accelerating (Takeoff)
PM ‐ Below VFE next and decelerating (Approach)
"FLAPS ONE" PM selects the FLAPS lever position and replies after checking the blue number
on the ECAM flaps indicator to confirm the correct selection has been made.

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 3/12
D to F → 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-B-00011911.0001001 / 23 DEC 14

GEAR CALLOUTS
CALLOUT REMARKS
PF "GEAR UP (DOWN)"
PM "GEAR UP (DOWN)" The PM selects the L/G lever position and replies
after checking the red lights on the LDG GEAR
indicator to confirm gear operation.

FLIGHT PARAMETERS
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-C-00011912.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: A319/20

APPROACH
During approach, the PM announces:
‐ "SPEED" if the speed decreases below the speed target -5 kt or increases above the speed
target +10 kt.
‐ "SINK RATE" when the descent rate exceeds 1 000 ft/min
‐ "BANK" when bank angle becomes greater than 7 °
‐ "PITCH" when pitch attitude becomes lower than -2.5 ° or higher than +10 °
‐ "LOC" or "GLIDE" when either localizer or glide slope deviation is:
• ½ dot LOC
• ½ dot GS.
‐ "CROSS TRACK" when the XTK is greater than 0.1 NM
‐ "V/DEV" when the vertical deviation is greater than ½ dot
‐ "COURSE" when greater than ½ dot or 2.5 ° (VOR) or 5 ° (ADF).
‐ "__ FT HIGH (LOW)" at altitude checks points.
Note: The PM announces the attitude deviations until landing.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-C-00011912.0002001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: A321

APPROACH
During approach, the PM announces:
‐ "SPEED" if the speed decreases below the speed target -5 kt or increases above the speed
target +10 kt
‐ "SINK RATE" when the descent rate exceeds 1 000 ft/min
‐ "BANK" when bank angle becomes greater than 7 °
‐ "PITCH" when pitch attitude becomes lower than -2.5 ° or higher than +7.5 °

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 4/12
← F to G → 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
OPERATING MANUAL

‐ "LOC" or "GLIDE" when either localizer or glide slope deviation is:


• ½ dot LOC
• ½ dot GS.
‐ "CROSS TRACK" when the XTK is greater than 0.1 NM
‐ "V/DEV" when the vertical deviation is greater than ½ dot
‐ "COURSE" when greater than ½ dot or 2.5 ° (VOR) or 5 ° (ADF)
‐ "__ FT HIGH (LOW)" at altitude checks points.
Note: The PM announces the attitude deviations until landing.

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 5/12
←G→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-C-00021570.0004001 / 22 MAR 17


Applicable to: A321

LANDING
During landing, the PM announces:
‐ "PITCH PITCH", if the pitch attitude approaches the tail strike pitch limit indicator  , or
reaches 7.5 °
‐ "BANK BANK", if the bank angle reaches 7 °.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-C-00021570.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: A319/20

LANDING
During landing, the PM announces:
‐ "PITCH PITCH", if the pitch attitude approaches the tail strike pitch limit indicator  , or
reaches 10 °
‐ "BANK BANK", if the bank angle reaches 7 °.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-C-00011913.0001001 / 22 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

GO-AROUND
During a go-around, the PM announces:
‐ "BANK", if the bank angle becomes greater than 7 °
‐ "PITCH", if the pitch attitude becomes greater than 20 ° up or less than 10 ° up
‐ "SINK RATE", if there is no climb rate.

PF/PM DUTIES TRANSFER


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-00011914.0001001 / 23 DEC 14
Applicable to: ALL

To transfer control, flight crewmembers must use the following callouts:


‐ To give control: The pilot calls out "YOU HAVE CONTROL". The other pilot accepts this transfer
by calling out "I HAVE CONTROL", before assuming PF duties.
‐ To take control: The pilot calls out "I HAVE CONTROL". The other pilot accepts this transfer by
calling out "YOU HAVE CONTROL", before assuming PM duties.

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 6/12
← G to H 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
OPERATING MANUAL

SUMMARY FOR EACH PHASE


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011917.0001001 / 23 DEC 14
Applicable to: ALL

TO REMOVE GROUND SUPPLY


EVENT PF or PM GND Mech
Initial ground contact GROUND (from) COCKPIT
COCKPIT (from) GROUND
External __ disconnection REMOVE EXTERNAL __
EXTERNAL__ REMOVED

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011918.0001001 / 23 DEC 14


Applicable to: ALL

BEFORE ENGINE START/PUSH BACK


EVENT PF PM
Before start up clearance received BEFORE START C/L
DOWN TO THE LINE
After start up clearance received BELOW THE LINE
BEFORE START C/L COMPLETE

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011919.0001001 / 17 MAR 16


Applicable to: ALL

PUSH BACK/ENGINE START


EVENT PF GND Mech.
When ready for pushback, and pushback GROUND (from) COCKPIT,
clearance received from ATC CLEARED FOR PUSH
COCKPIT (from) GROUND, RELEASE
BRAKES
Start of push BRAKES RELEASED READY
TO PUSH
When ready to start engines CLEAR TO START ?
CLEAR TO START
STARTING ENG(S)__
When pushback completed SET BRAKES
BRAKES SET
When ready to disconnect (after engine CLEAR TO DISCONNECT
started, and parameters are stabilized) (hand signals on left/right)
DISCONNECTING (hand signals on left/right)

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 7/12
I→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011920.0001001 / 23 DEC 14


Applicable to: ALL

AFTER ENGINE START


EVENT PF PM
All engines started and stabilized and AFTER START C/L
GND is disconnected
AFTER START C/L COMPLETE

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011921.0001001 / 23 DEC 14


Applicable to: OLD

TAXI
EVENT PF PM
When taxi clearance obtained CLEAR LEFT (RIGHT) SIDE
CLEAR RIGHT (LEFT) SIDE
Brake transfer check BRAKE CHECK
PRESSURE ZERO
Flight control check in the following FLIGHT CONTROL CHECK
sequence (can be done before start of
taxi)
1. Elevators FULL UP, FULL DOWN, NEUTRAL
2. Ailerons/Spoilers FULL LEFT, FULL RIGHT, NEUTRAL
3. Rudder(1) RUDDER FULL LEFT, FULL RIGHT, NEUTRAL
During taxi BEFORE TAKEOFF C/L
DOWN TO THE LINE
Lining up on the runway BELOW THE LINE
BEFORE TAKEOFF C/L COMPLETE
(1)  The PM should follow pedal movement with his/her feet
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011921.0002001 / 23 DEC 14
Applicable to: NEW

TAXI
EVENT PF PM
When taxi clearance obtained CLEAR LEFT (RIGHT) SIDE
CLEAR RIGHT (LEFT) SIDE
Brake check BRAKE CHECK
Flight control check in the following FLIGHT CONTROL CHECK
sequence (the check is possible before
the start of taxi)
1. Elevators FULL UP, FULL DOWN, NEUTRAL
2. Ailerons/Spoilers FULL LEFT, FULL RIGHT, NEUTRAL
3. Rudder(1) RUDDER FULL LEFT, FULL RIGHT, NEUTRAL
During taxi BEFORE TAKEOFF C/L
DOWN TO THE LINE
Continued on the following page

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 8/12
←I→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Continued from the previous page


TAXI
EVENT PF PM
Line up on the runway BELOW THE LINE
BEFORE TAKEOFF C/L COMPLETE
(1)  The PM should follow pedal movement with his/her feet
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011922.0001001 / 23 DEC 14
Applicable to: ALL

TAKEOFF
EVENT PF PM
Setting thrust levers to initial stabilization TAKEOFF
value
Before passing 80 kt THRUST SET
At 100 kt ONE HUNDRED KNOTS
CHECKED
At V1 V1
At VR ROTATE
Gear retraction POSITIVE CLIMB
GEAR UP
GEAR UP
If AP is engaged by PM AP 1(2) ON
Checklist AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB C/L
DOWN TO THE LINE
At transition altitude BELOW THE LINE
AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB C/L COMPLETE

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011924.0001001 / 12 MAY 16


Applicable to: ALL

ALTIMETER SETTING CHANGES TO/FROM QNH/QFE-STD


EVENT PF PM
Barometric setting change and SET STANDARD
subsequent altimeter cross-check (SET QNH/QFE)
STANDARD (QNH/QFE) CROSS-CHECKED
PASSING FL__(__FT) NOW
CHECKED

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011925.0001001 / 03 APR 18


Applicable to: ALL

APPROACH AND LANDING


EVENT PF PM
Approach checklist APPROACH C/L
APPROACH C/L COMPLETE
Continued on the following page

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 9/12
←I→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Continued from the previous page


APPROACH AND LANDING
EVENT PF PM
Activation of approach Phase ACTIVATE APPROACH
PHASE
APPROACH PHASE ACTIVATED
RA alive RADIO ALTIMETER ALIVE(1)(2)
CHECKED
 If the PF requests the
PM to set the go-around
altitude:
At F-G/S*, G/S*, FINAL APP or below SET GA ALTITUDE_FT
the go-around altitude for approach with GA ALTITUDE_SET
FPA guidance  If the PF sets the
go-around altitude:
GA ALTITUDE_SET
CHECKED
FDP PASSING__(Fix Name),__ FT,
CHECKED
Landing checklist LANDING C/L
LANDING C/L COMPLETE
1 000 ft RA ONE THOUSAND(2)
CHECKED
100 ft above MDA/DH ONE HUNDRED ABOVE(2)
CHECKED
MDA/DH visual reference MINIMUM(2)
CONTINUE
MDA/DH no visual reference MINIMUM(2)
GO AROUND-FLAPS
ONE HUNDRED(2)
FIFTY(2)
After touchdown
Ground spoilers extended SPOILERS(3)
REV green on EWD REVERSE GREEN(4)
Deceleration DECEL(5)
Continued on the following page

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 10/12
←I→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Continued from the previous page


APPROACH AND LANDING
EVENT PF PM
At 70 kt SEVENTY KNOTS
CHECKED
(1)  Crew awareness, crew should now keep RA in scan to landing
(2)  PM monitors pin-programmed auto callout, or announces if inoperative.
(3)  If the spoilers are not extended, call NO SPOILERS
(4)  If the reverse deployment is not as expected, call NO REVERSE ENGINE__ or NO REVERSE, as
appropriate.
(5)  DECEL Callout means that the deceleration is felt by the crew, and confirmed by the speed trend
on the PFD.If no positive deceleration, NO DECEL.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00015353.0001001 / 23 DEC 14
Applicable to: ALL

DISCONTINUED APPROACH
EVENT PF PM
DISCONTINUED APPROACH decision CANCEL APPROACH

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011926.0001001 / 17 MAR 16


Applicable to: ALL

GO AROUND
EVENT PF PM
GO AROUND decision GO AROUND - FLAPS
Flaps retraction FLAPS__
Gear retraction POSITIVE CLIMB
GEAR UP
GEAR UP
Checklist AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB C/L
DOWN TO THE LINE
At transition altitude BELOW THE LINE
AFTER TAKEOFF/CLIMB C/L COMPLETE

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011927.0001001 / 23 DEC 14


Applicable to: ALL

AFTER LANDING
EVENT PF PM
Checklist AFTER LANDING C/L
AFTER LANDING C/L COMPLETE

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 11/12
←I→ 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES - STANDARD CALLOUTS
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011928.0001001 / 23 DEC 14


Applicable to: ALL

PARKING
EVENT PF PM
Checklist PARKING C/L
PARKING C/L COMPLETE

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SOP-90-D-00011929.0001001 / 23 DEC 14


Applicable to: ALL

SECURING THE AIRCRAFT


EVENT PF PM
Checklist SECURING THE AIRCRAFT
C/L
SECURING THE AIRCRAFT C/L COMPLETE

PRO-NOR-SOP-90 P 12/12
←I 24 FEB 21
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

MANUAL ENGINE START


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-A-00009443.0004001 / 25 FEB 14
Applicable to: CFM

Pilots normally use automatic starting to start an engine.


However, manual starting is recommended in the following cases:
‐ After aborting a start, because of:
• Engine stall
• Engine EGT overlimit
• Low start air pressure
‐ When expecting a start abort, because of:
• Degraded bleed performance, due to hot conditions, or at a high-altitude airfields.
• An engine with a reduced EGT margin, in hot conditions, or at a high-altitude airfields.
• Marginal performance of the external pneumatic power group.
• Intermittent ECAM ENG 1(2) IGN A(B) FAULT alert, during the first start of the day.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-A-00009443.0002001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: V2500

Pilots normally use automatic starting to start an engine.


However, manual starting is recommended in the following cases :
‐ After aborting a start, because of :
• Engine stall, or Engine EGT overlimit, or LO START AIR PRESS, or No N1 rotation, or Hung
start.
‐ When expecting a start abort, because of :
• Degraded bleed performance, due to hot conditions, or at a high-altitude airfields.
• An engine with a reduced EGT margin, in hot conditions, or at a high-altitude airfields.
• Marginal performance of the external pneumatic power group.
• Tailwind greater than 10 kt
Starting in tailwind may fail due to N1 counterrotation, hot gas black flow. Fuel should be set to
ON at N2 max motoring speed, provided N1 has stopped, and turn clockwise. (confirmation by
the ground crew).
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-A-00009443.0001001 / 21 MAR 17
Applicable to: LEAP1A

Pilots normally use automatic starting to start an engine.

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 1/30
A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

However, manual starting is recommended in the following cases:


‐ After aborting a start, because of:
• Engine stall
• Engine EGT overlimit
• Low start air pressure
‐ When expecting a start abort, because of:
• Degraded bleed performance, due to hot conditions, or at a high-altitude airfields.
• An engine with a reduced EGT margin, in hot conditions, or at a high-altitude airfields.
• Marginal performance of the external pneumatic power group.
Ident.: TDU / PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-A-00022417.0002001 / 04 NOV 20
Applicable to: LEAP1A
Impacted DU: 00020858 Manual Engine Start - Procedure

MANUAL ENGINE START PROCEDURE


Note: During a manual engine start, if the flight crew suspects an engine start malfunction, or
if an engine-related ECAM alert is triggered, the PF must abort the start sequence as
follows:
‐ Before the ENG MASTER lever is set to ON, the PF must set the ENG MAN START
pb-sw to OFF
‐ After the ENG MASTER lever is set to ON, the PF must set the ENG MASTER lever to
OFF, and then the ENG MAN START pb-sw to OFF.
In that case, the flight crew should consider a dry crank cycle of the affected engine
before they perform another start attempt (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Engine
Ventilation (Dry Cranking)).
Then, in the case of an ECAM alert, the PF must announce "ECAM actions", in
accordance with the ECAM management philosophy.
THR LEVERS..............................................................................................................................IDLE
CAUTION The engines start regardless of the thrust lever position. If the thrust levers are not
set to IDLE, the thrust rapidly increases to the corresponding thrust lever position,
causing a hazardous situation.
ENG MODE sel........................................................................................ NORM THEN IGN/START
L2 The lower ECAM displays the engine page.
L1
Note: If both engines are started manually, the following procedure applies one engine at a
time.
 When all engines parameters are available on the upper ECAM display (no amber
crosses displayed):
ENG MAN START pb-sw....................................................................................................... ON

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 2/30
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

START VALVE...................................................................................................CHECK IN-LINE


N2 INCREASE................................................................................................................. CHECK
OIL PRESS INCREASE.................................................................................................. CHECK
L2
Depending on the thermal state of the engine, the FADEC can command an automatic dry
cranking before the start of the engine. The dry cranking may last up to approximately one
minute. During the dry cranking, the FADEC logic limits the maximum N2 around 30 %.
L1
 If the N2 does not reach 20 %:
PACK VALVES..........................................................................................CHECK CLOSED
 If the APU bleed is used for engine start and the pack valves are closed, shed
the APU electrical loads as follows:
L2
Shedding APU electrical loads enables to increase bleed air pressure.
L1 GALY & CAB............................................................................................................OFF
 If needed, shed also:
BLUE ELEC PUMP (on ground only)................................................................OFF
FUEL X FEED..................................................................................................... ON
FUEL PUMPS (except R TK PUMP 2)............................................................. OFF
BLOWER....................................................................................................... OVRD
CAB FANS.........................................................................................................OFF
 When N2 reaches the maximum motoring speed (20 % minimum) and 60 s after
selection of the ENG MAN START pb-sw:
Note: When the OAT is above 35 °C, and for engines with a degraded EGT margin, extend
the motoring time from 60 s to 2 min after selection of the ENG MAN START pb-sw.
Note: The maximum motoring speed is reached when a significant decrease in N2
acceleration is observed.
Do not attempt start unless N2 is at least 20 %.
ENG MASTER........................................................................................................................ ON
CHRONO.......................................................................................................................... START
L2 The PM starts the timing in order to monitor the light-up duration.
L1 IGNITERS A AND B................................................................................................. CHECK ON
FUEL FLOW INCREASE.................................................................................................CHECK
 15 s maximum after fuel flow increase:
EGT INCREASE.............................................................................................................. CHECK
N1 INCREASE................................................................................................................. CHECK

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 3/30
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

If the electrical power supply is interrupted during the start sequence (indicated by loss of
ECAM displays), abort the start by setting the ENG MASTER lever to OFF. Then perform a
30 s dry crank (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Engine Ventilation (Dry Cranking)).
 At 65 % N2 or slightly above:
IGNITERS A AND B................................................................................................CHECK OFF
START VALVE......................................................................................... CHECK CROSS LINE
MAIN ENG PARAMETERS.............................................................................CHECK NORMAL
SECONDARY ENG PARAMETERS............................................................... CHECK NORMAL
L2 The gray background on the N2 indication disappears.
L1 ENG MAN START pb-sw......................................................................................................OFF
ENG MODE sel................................................................................................................. NORM
 When no other engine requires a manual start:
SHEDDED SYSTEMS.......................................................................................... RESTORE
SOP - ENGINE START..........................................................................................RESUME
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-A-00020858.0050001 / 04 NOV 20
Applicable to: LEAP1A
Impacted by TDU: 00022417 Manual Engine Start - Procedure

MANUAL ENGINE START PROCEDURE


Note: During a manual engine start, if the flight crew suspects an engine start malfunction, or
if an engine-related ECAM alert is triggered, the PF must abort the start sequence as
follows:
‐ Before the ENG MASTER lever is set to ON, the PF must set the ENG MAN START
pb-sw to OFF
‐ After the ENG MASTER lever is set to ON, the PF must set the ENG MASTER lever to
OFF, and then the ENG MAN START pb-sw to OFF.
In that case, the flight crew should consider a dry crank cycle of the affected engine
before they perform another start attempt (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Engine
Ventilation (Dry Cranking)).
Then, in the case of an ECAM alert, the PF must announce "ECAM actions", in
accordance with the ECAM management philosophy.
THR LEVERS..............................................................................................................................IDLE
CAUTION The engines start regardless of the thrust lever position. If the thrust levers are not
set to IDLE, the thrust rapidly increases to the corresponding thrust lever position,
causing a hazardous situation.
ENG MODE sel........................................................................................ NORM THEN IGN/START
L2 The lower ECAM displays the engine page.

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 4/30
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

L1
Note: If both engines are started manually, the following procedure applies one engine at a
time.
 When all engines parameters are available on the upper ECAM display (no amber
crosses displayed):
ENG MAN START pb-sw....................................................................................................... ON
START VALVE...................................................................................................CHECK IN-LINE
N2 INCREASE................................................................................................................. CHECK
OIL PRESS INCREASE.................................................................................................. CHECK
L2
Depending on the thermal state of the engine, the FADEC can command an automatic dry
cranking before the start of the engine. The dry cranking may last up to approximately one
minute. During the dry cranking, the FADEC logic limits the maximum N2 around 30 %.
L1
 If the N2 does not reach 20 %:
PACK VALVES..........................................................................................CHECK CLOSED
 If the APU bleed is used for engine start and the pack valves are closed, shed
the APU electrical loads as follows:
L2
Shedding APU electrical loads enables to increase bleed air pressure.
L1 GALY & CAB............................................................................................................OFF
 If needed, shed also:
BLUE ELEC PUMP (on ground only)................................................................OFF
FUEL X FEED..................................................................................................... ON
FUEL PUMPS (except R TK PUMP 2)............................................................. OFF
BLOWER....................................................................................................... OVRD
CAB FANS.........................................................................................................OFF
 When N2 reaches the maximum motoring speed (20 % minimum) and 60 s after
selection of the ENG MAN START pb-sw:
Note: Note: The maximum motoring speed is reached when a significant decrease in N2
acceleration is observed.
Do not attempt start unless N2 is at least 20 %.
ENG MASTER........................................................................................................................ ON
CHRONO.......................................................................................................................... START
L2 The PM starts the timing in order to monitor the light-up duration.
L1 IGNITERS A AND B................................................................................................. CHECK ON
FUEL FLOW INCREASE.................................................................................................CHECK
 15 s maximum after fuel flow increase:
EGT INCREASE.............................................................................................................. CHECK

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 5/30
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

N1 INCREASE................................................................................................................. CHECK
If the electrical power supply is interrupted during the start sequence (indicated by loss of
ECAM displays), abort the start by setting the ENG MASTER lever to OFF. Then perform a
30 s dry crank (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Engine Ventilation (Dry Cranking)).
 At 65 % N2 or slightly above:
IGNITERS A AND B................................................................................................CHECK OFF
START VALVE......................................................................................... CHECK CROSS LINE
MAIN ENG PARAMETERS.............................................................................CHECK NORMAL
SECONDARY ENG PARAMETERS............................................................... CHECK NORMAL
L2 The gray background on the N2 indication disappears.
L1 ENG MAN START pb-sw......................................................................................................OFF
ENG MODE sel................................................................................................................. NORM
 When no other engine requires a manual start:
SHEDDED SYSTEMS.......................................................................................... RESTORE
SOP - ENGINE START..........................................................................................RESUME
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-A-00020858.0001001 / 19 DEC 17
Applicable to: OLD CFM

MANUAL ENGINE START PROCEDURE


Note: During a manual engine start, if the flight crew suspects an engine start malfunction, or
if an engine-related ECAM alert is triggered, the PF must abort the start sequence as
follows:
‐ Before the ENG MASTER lever is set to ON, the PF must set the ENG MAN START
pb-sw to OFF
‐ After the ENG MASTER lever is set to ON, the PF must set the ENG MASTER lever to
OFF, and then the ENG MAN START pb-sw to OFF.
In that case, the flight crew should consider a dry crank cycle of the affected engine
before they perform another start attempt (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Engine
Ventilation (Dry Cranking)).
Then, in the case of an ECAM alert, the PF must announce "ECAM actions", in
accordance with the ECAM management philosophy.
THR LEVERS..............................................................................................................................IDLE
CAUTION The engines start regardless of the thrust lever position. If the thrust levers are not
set to IDLE, the thrust rapidly increases to the corresponding thrust lever position,
causing a hazardous situation.
ENG MODE sel........................................................................................ NORM THEN IGN/START
L2 The lower ECAM displays the engine page.

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 6/30
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

L1
Note: If both engines are started manually, the following procedure applies one engine at a
time.
 When all engines parameters are available on the upper ECAM display (no amber
crosses displayed):
ENG MAN START pb-sw ...................................................................................................... ON
START VALVE...................................................................................................CHECK IN-LINE
N2 INCREASE................................................................................................................. CHECK
OIL PRESS INCREASE.................................................................................................. CHECK
 If the N2 does not reach 20 %:
PACK VALVES..........................................................................................CHECK CLOSED
 If the APU bleed is used for engine start and the pack valves are closed, shed
the APU electrical loads as follows:
L2
Shedding APU electrical loads enables to increase bleed air pressure.
L1 GALLEY....................................................................................................................OFF
 If needed, shed also:
BLUE ELEC PUMP (on ground only)................................................................OFF
FUEL X FEED..................................................................................................... ON
FUEL PUMPS (except R TK PUMP 2)............................................................. OFF
BLOWER....................................................................................................... OVRD
CAB FANS.........................................................................................................OFF
 When N2 reaches 22 % or the maximum motoring speed (20 % minimum):
Note: The maximum motoring speed is defined as the speed at which N2 acceleration is
less than 1 % in approximately 5 s.
ENG MASTER........................................................................................................................ ON
CHRONO.......................................................................................................................... START
L2 The PM starts the timing in order to monitor the light-up duration.
L1 IGNITERS A AND B................................................................................................. CHECK ON
FUEL FLOW INCREASE.................................................................................................CHECK
 15 s maximum after fuel flow increase:
EGT INCREASE.............................................................................................................. CHECK
N1 INCREASE................................................................................................................. CHECK
If the electrical power supply is interrupted during the start sequence (indicated by loss of
ECAM displays), abort the start by setting the ENG MASTER lever to OFF. Then perform a
30 s dry crank (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Engine Ventilation (Dry Cranking)).

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 7/30
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

 When N2 reaches 50 %:
START VALVE (between 50 and 56 % N2)............................................. CHECK CROSS LINE
IGNITERS A AND B................................................................................................CHECK OFF
MAIN ENG PARAMETERS.............................................................................CHECK NORMAL
SECONDARY ENG PARAMETERS............................................................... CHECK NORMAL
L2 The gray background on the N2 indication disappears.
L1
Note: CFM 56-5B1/B2 engines, N2 accelerates slowly from 50 % to idle. Start abort is not
required as long as N2 increases.
ENG MAN START pb-sw......................................................................................................OFF
ENG MODE sel................................................................................................................. NORM
 When no other engine requires to be started manually:
SHEDDED SYSTEMS.......................................................................................... RESTORE
SOP - ENGINE START..........................................................................................RESUME
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-A-00020858.0048001 / 19 DEC 17
Applicable to: V2500

MANUAL ENGINE START PROCEDURE


Note: During a manual engine start, if the flight crew suspects an engine start malfunction, or
if an engine-related ECAM alert is triggered, the PF must abort the start sequence as
follows:
‐ Before the ENG MASTER lever is set to ON, the PF must set the ENG MAN START
pb-sw to OFF
‐ After the ENG MASTER lever is set to ON, the PF must set the ENG MASTER lever to
OFF, and then the ENG MAN START pb-sw to OFF.
In that case, the flight crew should consider a dry crank cycle of the affected engine
before they perform another start attempt (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Engine
Ventilation (Dry Cranking)).
Then, in the case of an ECAM alert, the PF must announce "ECAM actions", in
accordance with the ECAM management philosophy.
THR LEVERS..............................................................................................................................IDLE
CAUTION The engines start regardless of the thrust lever position. If the thrust levers are not
set to IDLE, the thrust rapidly increases to the corresponding thrust lever position,
causing a hazardous situation.
ENG MODE sel........................................................................................ NORM THEN IGN/START
L2 The lower ECAM displays the engine page.

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 8/30
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

L1
Note: If both engines are started manually, the following procedure applies one engine at a
time.
 When all engines parameters (except N1 and N2) are available on the upper ECAM
display (no amber crosses displayed):
ENG MAN START pb-sw....................................................................................................... ON
START VALVE...................................................................................................CHECK IN-LINE
N2 INCREASE................................................................................................................. CHECK
OIL PRESS INCREASE.................................................................................................. CHECK
 If the N2 does not reach 16 %:
PACK VALVES..........................................................................................CHECK CLOSED
 If the APU bleed is used for engine start and the pack valves are closed, shed
the APU electrical loads as follows:
L2
Shedding APU electrical loads enables to increase bleed air pressure.
L1 GALY & CAB............................................................................................................OFF
 If needed, shed also:
BLUE ELEC PUMP (on ground only)................................................................OFF
FUEL X FEED..................................................................................................... ON
FUEL PUMPS (except R TK PUMP 2)............................................................. OFF
BLOWER....................................................................................................... OVRD
CAB FANS.........................................................................................................OFF
 If additional shedding is required:
HYD ENG PUMP........................................................................................ OFF
Return the hydraulic engine pump to ON for second engine start, to permit
PTU auto test.
 When N2 reaches the maximum motoring speed (16 % minimum) and 30 s after
selection of the ENG MAN START pb-sw:
Note: The maximum motoring speed is reached when a significant decrease in N2
acceleration is observed.
Do not attempt to start unless N2 is at least 16 %.
In hot weather conditions (OAT at or above 40 °C / 104 °F):
‐ If the residual EGT is above 100 °C, perform a 2 min dry crank in order to reduce the
residual EGT to the minimum achievable. Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Engine Ventilation
(Dry Cranking). Following the dry crank if the residual EGT is below 250 °C, the manual
start can be attempted after a 15 s wait time for starter lubrication.
‐ Starting with a residual EGT above 250 °C is not recommended.

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 9/30
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

ENG MASTER........................................................................................................................ ON
CHRONO.......................................................................................................................... START
L2 The PM starts the timing in order to monitor the light-up duration.
L1 IGNITERS A AND B................................................................................................. CHECK ON
FUEL FLOW INCREASE.................................................................................................CHECK
L2 With current EEC standard, fuel flow indication spiking occurs at fuel on.
L1
 20 s maximum after fuel flow increase:
EGT INCREASE.............................................................................................................. CHECK
N1 INCREASE (before 34 % N2)....................................................................................CHECK
If the electrical power supply is interrupted during the start sequence (indicated by the loss of
ECAM displays), abort the start by setting the ENG MASTER lever to OFF. Then perform a
30 s dry crank Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Engine Ventilation (Dry Cranking).
 When N2 reaches 43 %:
IGNITERS A AND B (at 43 % N2)..........................................................................CHECK OFF
START VALVE (slightly above 43 % N2)................................................. CHECK CROSS LINE
MAIN ENG PARAMETERS.............................................................................CHECK NORMAL
SECONDARY ENG PARAMETERS............................................................... CHECK NORMAL
L2 The gray background on the N2 indication disappears.
L1 ENG MAN START pb-sw......................................................................................................OFF
ENG MODE sel................................................................................................................. NORM
 When no other engine requires to be started manually:
SHEDDED SYSTEMS.......................................................................................... RESTORE
SOP - ENGINE START..........................................................................................RESUME

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 10/30
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-A-00020858.0003001 / 19 DEC 17


Applicable to: CFM NEW

MANUAL ENGINE START PROCEDURE


Note: During a manual engine start, if the flight crew suspects an engine start malfunction, or
if an engine-related ECAM alert is triggered, the PF must abort the start sequence as
follows:
‐ Before the ENG MASTER lever is set to ON, the PF must set the ENG MAN START
pb-sw to OFF
‐ After the ENG MASTER lever is set to ON, the PF must set the ENG MASTER lever to
OFF, and then the ENG MAN START pb-sw to OFF.
In that case, the flight crew should consider a dry crank cycle of the affected engine
before they perform another start attempt (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Engine
Ventilation (Dry Cranking)).
Then, in the case of an ECAM alert, the PF must announce "ECAM actions", in
accordance with the ECAM management philosophy.
THR LEVERS..............................................................................................................................IDLE
CAUTION The engines start regardless of the thrust lever position. If the thrust levers are not
set to IDLE, the thrust rapidly increases to the corresponding thrust lever position,
causing a hazardous situation.
ENG MODE sel........................................................................................ NORM THEN IGN/START
L2 The lower ECAM displays the engine page.
L1
Note: If both engines are started manually, the following procedure applies one engine at a
time.
 When all engines parameters are available on the upper ECAM display (no amber
crosses displayed):
ENG MAN START pb-sw....................................................................................................... ON
START VALVE...................................................................................................CHECK IN-LINE
N2 INCREASE................................................................................................................. CHECK
OIL PRESS INCREASE.................................................................................................. CHECK
 If the N2 does not reach 20 %:
PACK VALVES..........................................................................................CHECK CLOSED
 If the APU bleed is used for engine start and the pack valves are closed, shed
the APU electrical loads as follows:
L2
Shedding APU electrical loads enables to increase bleed air pressure.
L1 GALY & CAB............................................................................................................OFF

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 11/30
←A→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

 If needed, shed also:


BLUE ELEC PUMP (on ground only)................................................................OFF
FUEL X FEED..................................................................................................... ON
FUEL PUMPS (except R TK PUMP 2)............................................................. OFF
BLOWER....................................................................................................... OVRD
CAB FANS.........................................................................................................OFF
 When N2 reaches 22 % or the maximum motoring speed (20 % minimum):
Note: The maximum motoring speed is defined as the speed at which N2 acceleration is
less than 1 % in approximately 5 s.
ENG MASTER........................................................................................................................ ON
CHRONO.......................................................................................................................... START
L2 The PM starts the timing in order to monitor the light-up duration.
L1 IGNITERS A AND B................................................................................................. CHECK ON
FUEL FLOW INCREASE.................................................................................................CHECK
 15 s maximum after fuel flow increase:
EGT INCREASE.............................................................................................................. CHECK
N1 INCREASE................................................................................................................. CHECK
If the electrical power supply is interrupted during the start sequence (indicated by loss of
ECAM displays), abort the start by setting the ENG MASTER lever to OFF. Then perform a
30 s dry crank (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Engine Ventilation (Dry Cranking)).
 When N2 reaches 50 %:
START VALVE (between 50 and 56 % N2)............................................. CHECK CROSS LINE
IGNITERS A AND B................................................................................................CHECK OFF
MAIN ENG PARAMETERS.............................................................................CHECK NORMAL
SECONDARY ENG PARAMETERS............................................................... CHECK NORMAL
L2 The gray background on the N2 indication disappears.
L1
Note: CFM 56-5B1/B2 engines, N2 accelerates slowly from 50 % to idle. Start abort is not
required as long as N2 increases.
ENG MAN START pb-sw......................................................................................................OFF
ENG MODE sel................................................................................................................. NORM
 When no other engine requires to be started manually:
SHEDDED SYSTEMS.......................................................................................... RESTORE
SOP - ENGINE START..........................................................................................RESUME

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 12/30
←A 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

ENGINE START WITH AN AIR START UNIT


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-00020859.0005001 / 04 NOV 20
Applicable to: LEAP1A

 Before connecting the air start unit:


PACK 1......................................................................................................................................OFF
PACK 2......................................................................................................................................OFF
L2
Packs are selected off to prevent any possible contamination of the packs by the air start unit.
L1 APU BLEED.............................................................................................................................. OFF
ENG 1 BLEED.......................................................................................................................... OFF
ENG 2 BLEED.......................................................................................................................... OFF
X BLEED................................................................................................................................ OPEN
AIR START UNIT CONNECTION.........................................................................................REQUEST
 When cleared to start:
ENG 2...................................................................................................................................START
Note: ‐ For any operational reason, engine 1 can be started first.
In this case, check the brake ACCU pressure prior to engine start.
‐ The minimum recommended starter air supply pressure is 30 PSI when the start
valve is open.
 After Engine 2 is started:
WARNING Disconnection of the external power with the EXT PWR pb-sw set to ON may
cause injury to the ground engineer. Request disconnection of the external
power only with the EXT PWR pb-sw set to AVAIL.
EXT PWR................................................................................................................. CHECK AVAIL
EXT PWR DISCONNECTION........................................................................................ REQUEST
Note: The external electrical power can be removed after the second engine start.
 If the air start unit is used to start engine 1:
ENG 1...................................................................................................................................START
 When engine 1 is started:
AIR START UNIT DISCONNECTION...................................................................... REQUEST
X BLEED..........................................................................................................................AUTO
ENG 1 BLEED......................................................................................................................ON
ENG 2 BLEED......................................................................................................................ON
PACK 1.................................................................................................................................ON
PACK 2.................................................................................................................................ON

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 13/30
B→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

 If the crossbleed engine start procedure is used to start engine 1:


AIR START UNIT DISCONNECTION............................................................................ REQUEST
X BLEED................................................................................................................................ AUTO
Note: The X BLEED selector must be set to AUTO before the selection of the packs and
bleed. This is in order to prevent the increase of ground idle of engine 2.
PACK 1....................................................................................................................................... ON
PACK 2....................................................................................................................................... ON
ENG 2 BLEED............................................................................................................................ ON
CROSSBLEED ENGINE START PROC.............................................................................. APPLY
Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Crossbleed Engine Start
SOP - AFTER START.............................................................................................................RESUME

ENGINE START WITH AN AIR START UNIT


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-00020859.0002001 / 04 NOV 20
Applicable to: CFM

 Before connecting the air start unit:


PACK 1......................................................................................................................................OFF
PACK 2......................................................................................................................................OFF
L2
Packs are selected off to prevent any possible contamination of the packs by the air start unit.
L1 APU BLEED.............................................................................................................................. OFF
ENG 1 BLEED.......................................................................................................................... OFF
ENG 2 BLEED.......................................................................................................................... OFF
X BLEED................................................................................................................................ OPEN
AIR START UNIT CONNECTION.........................................................................................REQUEST
 When cleared to start:
ENG 2...................................................................................................................................START
Note: ‐ For any operational reason, engine 1 can be started first.
In this case, check the brake ACCU pressure prior to engine start.
‐ The minimum recommended starter air supply pressure is 30 PSI when the start
valve is open.
 After Engine 2 is started:
WARNING Disconnection of the external power with the EXT PWR pb-sw set to ON may
cause injury to the ground engineer. Request disconnection of the external
power only with the EXT PWR pb-sw set to AVAIL.
EXT PWR................................................................................................................. CHECK AVAIL

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 14/30
←B→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

EXT PWR DISCONNECTION........................................................................................ REQUEST


Note: The external electrical power can be removed after the second engine start.
 If the air start unit is used to start engine 1:
ENG 1...................................................................................................................................START
 When engine 1 is started:
AIR START UNIT DISCONNECTION...................................................................... REQUEST
X BLEED..........................................................................................................................AUTO
ENG 1 BLEED......................................................................................................................ON
ENG 2 BLEED......................................................................................................................ON
PACK 1.................................................................................................................................ON
PACK 2.................................................................................................................................ON
 If the crossbleed engine start procedure is used to start engine 1:
AIR START UNIT DISCONNECTION............................................................................ REQUEST
PACK 1....................................................................................................................................... ON
PACK 2....................................................................................................................................... ON
ENG 2 BLEED............................................................................................................................ ON
CROSSBLEED ENGINE START PROC.............................................................................. APPLY
Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Crossbleed Engine Start
SOP - AFTER START.............................................................................................................RESUME

ENGINE START WITH AN AIR START UNIT


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-00020859.0001001 / 04 NOV 20
Applicable to: V2500

 Before connecting the air start unit:


PACK 1......................................................................................................................................OFF
PACK 2......................................................................................................................................OFF
L2
Packs are selected off to prevent any possible contamination of the packs by the air start unit.
L1 APU BLEED.............................................................................................................................. OFF
ENG 1 BLEED.......................................................................................................................... OFF
ENG 2 BLEED.......................................................................................................................... OFF
X BLEED................................................................................................................................ OPEN
AIR START UNIT CONNECTION.........................................................................................REQUEST

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 15/30
←B→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

 When cleared to start:


ENG 2...................................................................................................................................START
Note: ‐ For any operational reason, engine 1 can be started first.
In this case, check the brake ACCU pressure prior to engine start.
‐ The minimum recommended starter air supply pressure is 25 PSI when the start
valve is open.
 After Engine 2 is started:
WARNING Disconnection of the external power with the EXT PWR pb-sw set to ON may
cause injury to the ground engineer. Request disconnection of the external
power only with the EXT PWR pb-sw set to AVAIL.
EXT PWR................................................................................................................. CHECK AVAIL
EXT PWR DISCONNECTION........................................................................................ REQUEST
Note: The external electrical power can be removed after the second engine start.
 If the air start unit is used to start engine 1:
ENG 1...................................................................................................................................START
 When engine 1 is started:
AIR START UNIT DISCONNECTION...................................................................... REQUEST
X BLEED..........................................................................................................................AUTO
ENG 1 BLEED......................................................................................................................ON
ENG 2 BLEED......................................................................................................................ON
PACK 1.................................................................................................................................ON
PACK 2.................................................................................................................................ON
 If the crossbleed engine start procedure is used to start engine 1:
AIR START UNIT DISCONNECTION............................................................................ REQUEST
PACK 1....................................................................................................................................... ON
PACK 2....................................................................................................................................... ON
ENG 2 BLEED............................................................................................................................ ON
CROSSBLEED ENGINE START PROC.............................................................................. APPLY
Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Crossbleed Engine Start
SOP - AFTER START.............................................................................................................RESUME

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 16/30
←B 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

CROSSBLEED ENGINE START


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-00020860.0005001 / 29 NOV 19
Applicable to: LEAP1A

CAUTION Do not perform the crossbleed engine start procedure during pushback.
Simultaneous use of engine bleed supply and external pneumatic power supply is
prohibited.
One engine must be running in order to supply air for other engine start.
 Before second engine start :
APU BLEED.............................................................................................................................. OFF
L2 The BLEED valve of the supplying engine reopens and the cross bleed valve closes.
L1 ENG BLEED (supplying engine).................................................................................................ON
ENG BLEED (receiving engine)................................................................................................OFF
L2 The bleed valve of receiving engine is closed to avoid reverse flow leakage.
L1
 When cleared to start :
AREA..................................................................................... CONFIRM CLEAR OF OBSTACLES
L2 Ensure increased power jet wake does not constitute any hazard to people or installations
behind the aircraft.
L1 X BLEED................................................................................................................................ OPEN
THR LEVER (supplying engine).............................................. ADJUST FOR BLEED PRESSURE
Adjust thrust of supplying engine to obtain an engine bleed pressure of 30 PSI before start
initiation, and at least 25 PSI during the start sequence.
If the thrust required to obtain the appropriate engine bleed pressure exceeds 40 % N1, pay
particular attention to the surrounding area.
RECEIVING ENGINE........................................................................................................... START
Apply the normal engine start procedure.
L2
Depending on the engine thermal state, the FADEC can command an automatic dry cranking
before the start of the engine. The dry cranking may last up to approximately one minute.
L1
 After start :
THR LEVER (supplying engine).............................................................................................. IDLE
X BLEED................................................................................................................................ AUTO
ENG BLEED (receiving engine)................................................................................................. ON
PACK 1....................................................................................................................................... ON
PACK 2....................................................................................................................................... ON

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 17/30
C→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

CROSSBLEED ENGINE START


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-00020860.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: V2500

CAUTION Do not perform the crossbleed engine start procedure during pushback.
Simultaneous use of engine bleed supply and external pneumatic power supply is
prohibited.
One engine must be running in order to supply air for other engine start.
 Before second engine start :
APU BLEED.............................................................................................................................. OFF
L2 The BLEED valve of the supplying engine reopens and the cross bleed valve closes.
L1 ENG BLEED (supplying engine).................................................................................................ON
ENG BLEED (receiving engine)................................................................................................OFF
L2 The bleed valve of receiving engine is closed to avoid reverse flow leakage.
L1 X BLEED................................................................................................................................ OPEN
 When cleared to start :
AREA CLEAR OF OBSTACLES..................................................................................... CONFIRM
L2 Ensure increased power jet wake does not constitute any hazard to people or installation behind
the aircraft.
L1 THR LEVER (supplying engine).............................................. ADJUST FOR BLEED PRESSURE
Adjust thrust of supplying engine to obtain an engine bleed pressure of 30 PSI before start
initiation, and at least 25 PSI during the start sequence.
If the thrust required to obtain the appropriate engine bleed pressure exceeds 40 % N1, pay
particular attention to the surrounding area.
RECEIVING ENGINE........................................................................................................... START
Apply the normal engine start procedure.
 After start :
THR LEVER (supplying engine).............................................................................................. IDLE
X BLEED................................................................................................................................ AUTO
ENG BLEED (receiving engine)................................................................................................. ON
PACK 1....................................................................................................................................... ON
PACK 2....................................................................................................................................... ON

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 18/30
←C→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

CROSSBLEED ENGINE START


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-00020860.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: CFM

CAUTION Do not perform the crossbleed engine start procedure during pushback.
Simultaneous use of engine bleed supply and external pneumatic power supply is
prohibited.
One engine must be running in order to supply air for other engine start.
 Before second engine start :
APU BLEED.............................................................................................................................. OFF
L2 The BLEED valve of the supplying engine reopens and the cross bleed valve closes.
L1 ENG BLEED (supplying engine).................................................................................................ON
ENG BLEED (receiving engine)................................................................................................OFF
L2 The bleed valve of receiving engine is closed to avoid reverse flow leakage.
L1 X BLEED................................................................................................................................ OPEN
 When cleared to start :
AREA CLEAR OF OBSTACLES..................................................................................... CONFIRM
L2 Ensure increased power jet wake does not constitute any hazard to people or installation behind
the aircraft.
L1 THR LEVER (supplying engine).............................................. ADJUST FOR BLEED PRESSURE
Adjust thrust of supplying engine to obtain an engine bleed pressure of 30 PSI before start
initiation, and at least 25 PSI during the start sequence.
If the thrust required to obtain the appropriate engine bleed pressure exceeds 40 % N1, pay
particular attention to the surrounding area.
Note: If the supplying engine is a DAC engine, preset a 30 % N1 before launching the start
sequence.
RECEIVING ENGINE........................................................................................................... START
Apply the normal engine start procedure.
 After start :
THR LEVER (supplying engine).............................................................................................. IDLE
X BLEED................................................................................................................................ AUTO
ENG BLEED (receiving engine)................................................................................................. ON
PACK 1....................................................................................................................................... ON
PACK 2....................................................................................................................................... ON

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 19/30
←C 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

AIR CONDITIONING DURING AUTOMATIC ENGINE START


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-00021159.0002001 / 04 MAY 18
Applicable to: LEAP1A

During automatic engine start, the FADEC commands a dry crank that may significantly extend the
engine start duration. This procedure enables to use the air conditioning during the start sequence of
the engine 1 in order to enhance passenger’s comfort.
This procedure can only be used if engine 2 is started before engine 1, as per Standard Operating
Procedures, with APU bleed or external pneumatic power.
ENG 2......................................................................................................................................... START
 When idle is reached (AVAIL indication is displayed):
XBLEED.................................................................................................................................. SHUT
L2 The PACK 2 Flow Control Valve will automatically open.
L1 ENG 1......................................................................................................................................... START
 When idle is reached (AVAIL indication is displayed):
XBLEED..................................................................................................................................AUTO
NORMAL PROCEDURE......................................................................................................... RESUME

ENGINE START VALVE MANUAL OPERATION


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-00020861.0011001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: LEAP1A

BEFORE ENGINE START


Advise the ground crew to prepare for a manual operation of the start valve.
WARNING To ensure safety of the ground crew when starting an engine with manual
operation of the start valve, the flight crew must:
‐ Start the affected engine first
‐ Use the APU to supply air to the engine. Use of external pneumatic power is
prohibited.

ENGINE START
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL..........................................................................................................CAB
APU................................................................................................................................................ON
APU BLEED...................................................................................................................................ON
L2 Air pressure remains sufficiently low to ensure that the EEC does not order that the start valve be
intermittently opened and closed.
L1 GROUND CREW CLEARANCE............................................................................................OBTAIN

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 20/30
D to E → 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

 If the start valve is failed closed:


 When the ground crew is ready:
“ENGINE 1(2) START”......................................................................................ANNOUNCE
ENG MODE sel.................................................................................................. IGN/START
Apply the following two actions simultaneously:
ENG MAN START pb-sw.................................................................................................ON
L2 During an automatic start, the EEC detects that the start valve is failed closed and aborts
the start. The EEC does not abort the start sequence during a manual start when a start
valve is failed closed.
L1 “OPEN START VALVE AND KEEP OPEN”............................................................. ORDER
L2 If not opened when the ENG MAN START pb-sw is set to ON, the ENG 1(2) START
FAULT - STARTER SHAFT SHEAR alert is triggered.
If not maintained in the OPEN position by the ground crew, the start valve closes.
Note: in the case of an electrical failure, the ENG 1(2) START FAULTalert may be
triggered and must be disregarded.
L1
 When N2 reaches the maximum motoring speed (minimum 20 %) and 1 min after the
ENG MAN START pb-sw is set to ON:
ENG MASTER..................................................................................................................ON
 When N2 is slightly above 63 %:
“CLOSE START VALVE”..........................................................................................ORDER
 When idle is reached (AVAIL indication displayed):
ENG MAN START pb-sw............................................................................................... OFF
 If the start valve is failed open:
 When the ground crew is ready:
“ENGINE 1(2) START”......................................................................................ANNOUNCE
ENG MODE sel.................................................................................................. IGN/START
ENG MASTER..................................................................................................................ON
 When N2 is slightly above 63 %:
"CLOSE START VALVE"..........................................................................................ORDER
SOP – ENGINE START...................................................................................................... RESUME

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 21/30
←E→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

ENGINE START VALVE MANUAL OPERATION


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-00020861.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: CFM

BEFORE ENGINE START


Advise ground crew to prepare for manual engine start valve operation.
WARNING To ensure safety of the ground crew when starting an engine with manual
operation of the start valve, the flight crew should start the affected engine first.
ENGINE START
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL..........................................................................................................CAB
GROUND CREW CLEARANCE............................................................................................OBTAIN
 When the ground crew is ready:
“ENGINE 1(2) START”............................................................................................ ANNOUNCE
ENG MODE sel.........................................................................................................IGN/START
ENG MASTER........................................................................................................................ ON
“OPEN START VALVE AND KEEP OPEN”....................................................................ORDER
If not maintained in the OPEN position by the ground crew, the start valve closes.
 When N2 at 50 %:
“CLOSE START VALVE”................................................................................................ ORDER
SOP – ENGINE START............................................................................................... RESUME

ENGINE START VALVE MANUAL OPERATION


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-00020861.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: V2500

BEFORE ENGINE START


Advise ground crew to prepare for manual engine start valve operation.
WARNING To ensure safety of the ground crew when starting an engine with manual
operation of the start valve, the flight crew should start the affected engine first.
ENGINE START
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL..........................................................................................................CAB
GROUND CREW CLEARANCE............................................................................................OBTAIN
 When the ground crew is ready:
“ENGINE 1(2) START”............................................................................................ ANNOUNCE
ENG MODE sel.........................................................................................................IGN/START
ENG MASTER........................................................................................................................ ON

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 22/30
←E→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

“OPEN START VALVE AND KEEP OPEN”....................................................................ORDER


If not maintained in the OPEN position by the ground crew, the start valve closes.
 When N2 at 43 %:
“CLOSE START VALVE”................................................................................................ ORDER
SOP – ENGINE START............................................................................................... RESUME

ENGINE VENTILATION (DRY CRANKING)


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-00020943.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: NEO

On ground, after:
‐ An unsuccessful manual engine start, or
‐ An unsuccessful automatic start not followed by an automatic dry crank,
the flight crew can perform a dry crank cycle on the affected engine to remove the fuel vapors.
 Before dry crank:
ENG MASTER (affected engine)................................................................................ CHECK OFF
ENG MODE sel....................................................................................................... CHECK NORM
ENG MAN START pb-sw (affected engine)................................................................CHECK OFF
 Dry crank:
ENG MODE sel................................................................................................................... CRANK
ENG MAN START pb-sw (affected engine)............................................................................... ON
Note: To clear fuel vapors, a 30 seconds dry crank cycle is the minimum required.
L2 Note: A manual start sequence can be initiated following a dry crank cycle (Refer to
PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Manual Engine Start - Procedure). The flight crew should consider
the starter limitations (Refer to LIM-ENG Starter).
Note: Depending on the engine thermal state, the FADEC can initiate an automatic bowed rotor
protection sequence, corresponding to a dry cranking limiting maximum N2 to around 30 %.
After approximately 1 minute maximum, the automatic bowed rotor protection cranking
stops. The N2 value is no longer limited and increases up to the maximum motoring speed.
L1
 When the dry crank is completed:
ENG MAN START pb-sw (affected engine)............................................................................. OFF
ENG MODE sel..................................................................................................................... NORM

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 23/30
← E to F → 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

ENGINE VENTILATION (DRY CRANKING)


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-00020943.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: CEO

On ground, after:
‐ An unsuccessful manual engine start, or
‐ An unsuccessful automatic start not followed by an automatic dry crank,
the flight crew can perform a dry crank cycle on the affected engine to remove the fuel vapors.
 Before dry crank:
ENG MASTER (affected engine)................................................................................ CHECK OFF
ENG MODE sel....................................................................................................... CHECK NORM
ENG MAN START pb-sw (affected engine)................................................................CHECK OFF
 Dry crank:
ENG MODE sel................................................................................................................... CRANK
ENG MAN START pb-sw (affected engine)............................................................................... ON
Note: To clear fuel vapors, a 30 seconds dry crank cycle is the minimum required.
L2 Note: A manual start sequence can be initiated following a dry crank cycle (Refer to
PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Manual Engine Start - Procedure). The flight crew should consider
the starter limitations (Refer to LIM-ENG Starter).
L1
 When the dry crank is completed:
ENG MAN START pb-sw (affected engine)............................................................................. OFF
ENG MODE sel..................................................................................................................... NORM

ONE ENGINE TAXI - GENERAL


Applicable to: ALL
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CA-00021004.0001001 / 17 MAR 17

Except in some operational conditions (e.g. uphill slopes, slippery taxiways or high gross weights),
brake life and fuel savings may govern company policy on permitting aircraft to taxi with one engine
shut down.
Before applying this procedure, the flight crew should be aware of the following:
‐ Taxi with one engine shut down may require higher thrust than usual. Caution must therefore be
exercised to avoid excessive jet-blast and the risk of Foreign Object Damage (FOD)
‐ Slow or tight turns in the direction of the operating engine may not be possible at high gross
weights
‐ When one engine taxi is planned, pay particular attention to the fuel imbalance limitation for the
next take-off.

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 24/30
← F to G 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

ONE ENGINE TAXI - AT DEPARTURE


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CB-00021005.0003001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: NEO

BRAKE ACCU PRESS...............................................................................................................CHECK


L2 If necessary, use the Y ELEC PUMP to pressurize the brake accumulator.
L1 ENG 1......................................................................................................................................... START

L2 Engine 1 pressurizes the green hydraulic system, providing normal braking.

L1
APPLY THE “AFTER START” NORMAL PROCEDURE, BUT:
‐ The APU can be kept running. In that case, switch the APU BLEED to OFF.
L2 The APU generator provides power to prevent electrical transients and enable galley and
IFE operation. Closing the APU BLEED prevents engine exhaust gases ingestion in the air
conditioning system.
L1 ‐ If the APU is shut down, the remaining engine should be started using the Crossbleed Engine

Start procedure (Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Crossbleed Engine Start).


‐ Delay the ECAM STATUS check and the wing anti-ice setting until all engines are started.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CB-00021005.0002001 / 09 APR 18
Applicable to: CEO NEW

BRAKE ACCU PRESS...............................................................................................................CHECK


L2 If necessary, use the Y ELEC PUMP to pressurize the brake accumulator.
L1 ENG 1......................................................................................................................................... START

L2 Engine 1 pressurizes the green hydraulic system, providing normal braking.

L1 X BLEED.......................................................................................................................................OPEN

L2 Open the cross bleed valve in order to supply both packs with engine 1.

L1
APPLY THE “AFTER START” NORMAL PROCEDURE, BUT:
‐ Keep the APU running and switch the APU BLEED to OFF.
L2 The APU generator provides power to the engine fire extinguisher, prevents electrical transients
and enables galley and IFE operation. Closing the APU BLEED prevents engine exhaust gases
ingestion in the air conditioning system.
L1 ‐ Delay the ECAM STATUS check and the wing anti-ice setting until all engines are started.

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CB-00021005.0001001 / 09 APR 18


Applicable to: CEO OLD

BRAKE ACCU PRESS...............................................................................................................CHECK


L2 If necessary, use the Y ELEC PUMP to pressurize the brake accumulator.

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 25/30
H→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

L1 ENG 1......................................................................................................................................... START


L2 Engine 1 pressurizes the green hydraulic system, providing nosewheel steering and normal braking
without using the PTU.
L1 X BLEED.......................................................................................................................................OPEN

L2 Open the cross bleed valve in order to supply both packs with engine 1.

L1
APPLY THE “AFTER START” NORMAL PROCEDURE, BUT:
‐ Keep the APU running and switch the APU BLEED to OFF.
L2 The APU generator provides power to the engine fire extinguisher, prevents electrical transients
and enables galley and IFE operation. Closing the APU BLEED prevents engine exhaust gases
ingestion in the air conditioning system.
L1 ‐ Delay the ECAM STATUS check and the wing anti-ice setting until all engines are started.

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CB-00021007.0002001 / 17 MAR 17


Applicable to: CEO NEW + NEO

BEFORE RELEASING THE PARKING BRAKE


Y ELEC PUMP.............................................................................................................................. ON
L2 This pressurizes the yellow hydraulic system, providing nosewheel steering without using the PTU.
L1
APPLY THE “TAXI” NORMAL PROCEDURE, BUT:
‐ Delay the flight controls check until all engines are started
‐ Arm the autobrake after the flight controls check.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CB-00021007.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: CEO OLD

BEFORE RELEASING THE PARKING BRAKE


Y ELEC PUMP.............................................................................................................................. ON
L2 This pressurizes the yellow hydraulic system.
L1
APPLY THE “TAXI” NORMAL PROCEDURE, BUT:
‐ Delay the flight controls check until all engines are started
‐ Arm the autobrake after the flight controls check.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CB-00021008.0006001 / 02 DEC 19
Applicable to: CEO

BEFORE TAKEOFF
ENGINE WARM-UP TIME BEFORE TAKEOFF (remaining engine)...............................CONSIDER
L2 The second engine must be started soon enough before takeoff, in order to take into account the
engine start time and ensure the applicable engine warm-up time (Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-09
After Start - ENG Mode Selector).

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 26/30
←H→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

L1
 For ENG 2 start and when taxiing in a straight line:
Note: 1. During the engine start, a slight jerk forward may occur if the brakes are applied
while the aircraft is moving.
2. Maintain taxi in a straight line during at least 5 s after the selection of the ENG 2
master lever to ON, in order to ensure the PTU auto-test is completed.
Y ELEC PUMP......................................................................................................................OFF
L2 The yellow electric pump must be set to OFF to enable PTU automatic test during engine 2
start.
L1 APU BLEED............................................................................................................................ ON
 After 10 s
ENG 2........................................................................................................................ START
L2 Wait 10 s before the ENG 2 start, in order to ensure that the bleed system valves are no
longer in transit. This time delay will prevent ENG 1 stall.
L1 APU.................................................................................................................................... AS RQRD
X BLEED................................................................................................................................... AUTO
APPLY THE “AFTER START” NORMAL PROCEDURE, INCLUDING:
‐ ECAM STATUS check
‐ Selection of the ENG 2 anti-ice and wing anti-ice, as required.
AFTER START CHECKLIST.......................................................................................... COMPLETE
FLIGHT CONTROLS..............................................................................................................CHECK
AUTO BRK.................................................................................................................................. MAX
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CB-00021008.0004001 / 02 DEC 19
Applicable to: NEO

BEFORE TAKEOFF
ENGINE WARM-UP TIME BEFORE TAKEOFF (remaining engine)...............................CONSIDER
L2 The second engine must be started soon enough before takeoff, in order to take into account the
engine start time and ensure the applicable engine warm-up time (Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-09
After Start - ENG Mode Selector).
L1
 For ENG 2 start, and when taxiing in a straight line:
Note: 1. During the engine start, a slight jerk forward may occur if the brakes are applied
while the aircraft is moving.
2. Maintain taxi in a straight line during at least 5 s after the selection of the ENG 2
master lever to ON, in order to ensure the PTU auto-test is completed.

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 27/30
←H→ 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

Y ELEC PUMP......................................................................................................................OFF
L2 The yellow electric pump must be set to OFF to enable PTU automatic test during engine 2
start.
L1
 If the APU bleed is available:
APU BLEED..................................................................................................................... ON
 After 10 s
ENG 2..................................................................................................................START
L2 Wait 10 s before the ENG 2 start, in order to ensure that the bleed system valves are
no longer in transit. This time delay will prevent ENG 1 stall.
L1
 If the APU bleed is not available:
CROSSBLEED ENGINE START.........................................................................PERFORM
Refer to PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG Crossbleed Engine Start.
APU.................................................................................................................................... AS RQRD
APPLY THE “AFTER START” NORMAL PROCEDURE, INCLUDING:
‐ ECAM STATUS check
‐ Selection of the ENG 2 anti-ice and wing anti-ice, as required.
AFTER START CHECKLIST.......................................................................................... COMPLETE
FLIGHT CONTROLS..............................................................................................................CHECK
AUTO BRK.................................................................................................................................. MAX

ONE ENGINE TAXI - AT ARRIVAL


Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CC-00021009.0002001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: NEO

APU........................................................................................................................................ AS RQRD
L2 If necessary, the APU can be started while taxiing and before shutting down one engine, in order to
avoid additional electrical transients and enable galley and IFE operation.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CC-00021009.0001001 / 09 APR 18
Applicable to: CEO

APU............................................................................................................................................. START
L2 Start the APU before shutting down one engine, in order to provide power to the engine fire
extinguisher, avoid electrical transients and enable galley and IFE operation.

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 28/30
← H to I → 18 NOV 20
PROCEDURES
NORMAL PROCEDURES
A319/A320/A321
FLIGHT CREW SUPPLEMENTARY PROCEDURES - ENGINES
OPERATING MANUAL

Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CC-00021010.0002001 / 17 MAR 17


Applicable to: NEO

 After high thrust operations:


ENGINE MINIMUM COOLING TIME............................................................................ CONSIDER
Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-22 Parking - ENG MASTER Levers.
 When taxiing in a straight line:
Note: During engine shutdown, a slight jerk forward may occur if the brakes are applied while
the aircraft is moving.
ENG 2........................................................................................................................ SHUT DOWN
Y ELEC PUMP............................................................................................................................ON
L2 This avoids running the PTU.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CC-00021010.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: CEO

 After high thrust operations:


ENGINE MINIMUM COOLING TIME............................................................................ CONSIDER
Refer to PRO-NOR-SOP-22 Parking - ENG MASTER Levers.
 When the APU indicates AVAIL and taxiing in a straight line:
Note: During engine shutdown, a slight jerk forward may occur if the brakes are applied while
the aircraft is moving.
ENG 2........................................................................................................................ SHUT DOWN
Y ELEC PUMP............................................................................................................................ON
L2 This avoids running the PTU.
Ident.: PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG-CC-00021011.0001001 / 17 MAR 17
Applicable to: ALL

 At parking:
Y ELEC PUMP..........................................................................................................................OFF
ENG 1........................................................................................................................ SHUT DOWN

PRO-NOR-SUP-ENG P 29/30
←I 18 NOV 20

You might also like